Home

TransForm A X Terminal user`s manual

1. display area OMNIBUS 2 display area OMNIBUS 3 display area OMNIBUS 4 video 1 video 7 video 8 video 9 video 10 video 11 video 12 video 13 video 21 video 22 video 23 video 24 video 25 video 26 video 27 video 28 video 29 video 30 video 41 video 42 video 43 video 44 video 45 video 46 video 47 video 48 video 49 video 50 19 0 110 2 110 3 111 0 111 1 111 2 111 3 112 0 19 0 19 1 19 2 3 110 0 110 1 110 2 10 3 111 0 1 1 113 0 13 1 113 2 113 3 114 0 114 1 114 2 114 3 115 0 115 1 T I T T T T T T T T T T video 14 video 15 video 16 video 17 video 18 video 19 video 20 video 31 video 32 video 33 video 34 video 35 video 36 video 37 video 38 wideo 39 video 40 video 51 video 52 video 53 video 54 video 55 video 56 video 57 video 58 video 59 video 60 112 1 7 N22 112 33 N30 H134 13 2 N3 3 111 2 111 3 12 0 12 1 12 2 12 3 1113 0 13 1 13 2 13 3 115 2 1115 3 116 0 1116 1 116 2 116 3 117 0 17 1 H172 1117 3 r video 2 video 3 19 1 19 2 video 4 video 5 video 6 19 3 110 0 110 1 q p D q gt N A N AD LL OMNIBUS 4 OmNIBUS 2 OMNIBUS 3 7 8 9 10 11
2. ccc 4 12 distributed system assignment of graphic Cards ccceseeeeeees 3 19 10 Las Rear er enee oan eee eT AE MCR 3 33 COMMGULATIOMN ss an 3 54 3 61 network options ccc cecesecescesecsseeseeteeeseenes 3 51 SWEN 10 aena aa ects 3 48 VGA monitor for configuration 3 19 3 46 distributed sytem e sssesesseseessssesessossesessesresesseses 2 4 distributed video configuration cccceeeee 3 63 DER r tokiseetn cae costene oie dratneeas neacereees 227 documentato nasao an a n 1 8 Dual DVI Input Card control panel control occ ceceseeteeeeeees 4 31 LEEI ELE AAA E AA E E 7 14 module video ooo ccessecessecssseeeenees 4 6 4 12 EE E IEE E E E AEE 3 26 3 39 BARS 2 E E E E E E TT 7 technical CAA ends eawactestacdteo shade a 7 6 Dual RGB Input Card COLOMCAPADINEICS srne nroa 4 6 CONTIQUIATION seriinin aa aa 4 35 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1__1__ 9 1 control panel CONIOI ee eeceeeseeeeeteeeees 4 33 control panel input settings eee 4 34 control Panel FEGISTIY eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeee 4 34 interface oo cecesccsscsscesceseesscesecsseesceseessceseeaeens 7 15 module video wee eee ceesseceesecesseeeesneee 4 6 4 12 ONCE EEE EEEE OA OE E E NE 3 28 3 37 3 39 DIESE aE R 7 7 DIO DOTUIGS iaoi 4 15 LECIMIGA Cal dich craeieeeGreic ieee Mies 7 7 Dual DVI to 2xCRT adapter cable interface
3. video 16 115 3 video 17 116 0 video 18 116 1 video 19 116 2 video 20 116 3 OMNIBUS 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 sala alals elz alo 000 0 0 0 O O O O O O ha v gs 7 8 9 10 11 12 Nad ww wy PCI PROCESSOR OMNIBUS 1 Figure 3 49 medium monolithic system The system is realized with a monolithic system Here it is advantageous to use one OmniBus for the graphic cards the other for OMNISCALERS and input cards and therefore for the output to the display wall Because all input cards and OMNISCALERS fit in the same OmniBus all video windows are freely movable on the whole display wall Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 42 Large monolithic system 3 Getting started The following system has 54 channels digital output and 60 video windows that are movable and scalable within their respective display area To get video windows that are freely movable on the whole display wall a distributed system would be required instead
4. Having an OmniBus A12 with seven up to twelve expansion cards e The expansion cards are inserted as described in the service manual with the only difference that the OMNISCALERS are omitted Respect the other general instructions for insertion of expansion cards given in the Service manual Make sure that any actions at the open device are carried out by qualified service personnel special requirements also some subtle configurations might exist In case of doubt contact the Barco support please refer to section 8 3 Hot line Q These rules are a suggestion for best performance for an OmNiBus A12 in plain video mode For Functionality of video RGB windows Video windows of plain video behave the same way like standard video using OMNISCALERS except for the follow ing items e Upscaling Video data can only be displayed 1 1 or downscaled Downscaled window content requires less bandwidth Therefore only the actually displayed pixels must be considered when calculating the bandwidth e Resizing Resizing is only useful as long as the video window is not larger than the standard size e Visual class Only the visual class TrueColor 16bit or 32bit supports plain video mode e If using multiple OmniBus A12 devices a video can only be displayed on the projection modules that are connected to the graphic cards of that device that contains also the input card of that video Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manu
5. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKEK The X Server configuration is finished now a please enter your choice wy KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKEKEK 1 Exit configuration all your current entries will be lost 2 Finish configuration Enter your X Server Configuration 2 42 Configuring the X Server Please wait kkxkxxkx xkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkx xkxkxkxkxkxk xk xkxkxkxkxk kxk xkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk xk xkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk kxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk kxx k Multiscreen X Server setup done Have fun NOTE enter service mmtserv to start the X Server kkxkxkxkxkxkxkx xkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxxkxk kxxk When configuration is completed you can enter service mmt serv to start the X server eos opt MMT2686 config service mmtserv If you operate TransForm A in eXtended safety boot mode please take care to update the backup partition after successful configuration see section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____ 3 60 3 Getting started 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system Configuring a distributed system is largely similar to configuring a monolithic system See Torm section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration for the basic course of the insta
6. 14 1 video2 video6 15 1 l 4 2 video3 video7 15 1 1 4 3 video4 video8 15 3 video17 video24 video22 Video9 video13 18 0 19 3 19 1 16 0 17 0 video18 video19 Video10 video14 18 1 eg 3 1 6 1 1 7 1 video20 a 18 3 video11 video video23 1 6 2 17 2 video21 19 2 a video12 video16 1 6 3 17 3 OMNIBUS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PCl PROCESSOR Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Figure 3 48 small system in OmniBus configuration 3 41 Medium monolithic system 3 Getting started An example for a configuration for a system with digital output 24 channels and 20 freely movable video win dows can be seen in the figure below video 1 112 0 video 2 112 1 video 3 112 2 video 4 112 3 video 5 113 0 video 6 113 1 video 7 113 2 video 8 113 3 video 9 114 0 video 10 114 1 video 11 114 2 video 12 H114 3 115 0 video 13 video 15 115 2 video 14 115 1
7. 7 11 Dual DVI to 2xDVI D adapter cable interface 7 11 DVD ROM Live cecccccccsccscessscssscsssecssesssesseens 3 3 EDID a a EE E 4 32 encoder setna S erea E 4 26 FOSCONTI Gorapena N 3 53 eosinfo Utility ceanna 4 69 COSKS UT oia ENS 4 67 Ethernet Card eromena 3 30 3 31 eXtended safety boot MOde ccc ceceseeseeeeees 6 2 Extenders aiai 2 3 ROUS Oar a E 3 13 LE CII AOU a onanstctantins seepacpassadasadvacutuessrtesdoseGgais 7 2 EDA aaa T ER 3 22 GIVE TMC UU narra O 4 19 filterexchIng Se eee des dctleteesin ise antec ssncaetee 5 2 HIDE WV All EEE EEE PAE LIE EEEN PA 3 59 POD DY GISKS GI VC eno Sale oetcarest wwe 3 3 font Server configuration 0 0 ee ececesseeeeeeeeeees 3 57 freely moveable video WINdOW c ccccceee 4 14 genlock CODING sashes saczesssattses sasacsacen aa eastacaanegyetastensssones 3 35 POPETI ES usaia eaten etc hnvelineieteescuor teats 4 13 A SONE EXEN ON secur teeter RENN 4 8 GENOE CON E aii 4 9 GENlOCK GU citanse eda ricl henenes aoe 4 71 geometry advanced configuration 0 6 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch oo cece cseeeeeteeeees 3 30 COMMOCUIN O crier eavonteatcuceocaneniansecoee 3 33 graphic card COMMQUTATION sarcosine iaa ewan 3 55 D al DVI int rfI Ennn 7 10 ONGC APAA E EO NEETE dozen 3 37 3 39 technical Gale aee eee eters 7 3 graphic channel EED T EEE E E E E 6 23 ASSAM EN Tecer t 3 18 6 13 graphical user interface REMOteE CONTIOL eee ec ceeeseeseeeseeteessceseese
8. Please correct the following points in this documentation DOC 3265 2 page wrong correct Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Contents POU 0 a peer ne Reet reser re ge ase ry er a ean ae E ee ee ere ee Tee ee 1 1 1 1 How this manualis organized 1 52285 saceccesstesewseesetaataneateesevsaaetainnlendees allel nae ees ede es 1 2 Ms De SUV Sel SY INI Shs aes E Sate aaah te Cadet tk a Matera ha cate tach ok aD ae heat EA E ates oe 1 3 eS A 61 0 a rer ee ona eT nn aC Eo a Te RET SR eT te ne PREG AO er te ene re eRe ee 1 4 SRA ESS 11a 1s cet ea mee i ce Oe eee eer ae 1 4 EARE CUON eaa asi gic ht etna tahete sak ache chet cle name T E E 1 4 Too MUP AGING A OVI O So anan acetate cos cttretn tetas ia betel deel OE T 1 6 Eo AMO deere OR RT RS Te ee 1 6 Be SOV ICI atone ast ou 2 5 ca tha ssa cesar toeto a E aad Banueuescatctielats 1 7 gS sec ERIN meee ee memento nae eer eee eR Se tie en TCL ee ene 1 7 SFR O DACs asssncssasosecsacasacazes AN E 1 7 UA ON TiN IVa esenea ing cotesnanea ta wecaacn tetecua eae EE 1 8 2 SUMMA ececatacesecetaceseontaveneceaanaceseseuscocsaesecsvaneeeuseaaaaeosaavasessaanacassaeaacasssesneasasesesavavasecessrasecuussasaseseueonsesets 2 1 2 EP Me haaa act cotes stcee std ne totes catac sete atca sent A E E wa kecenececeatneess 2 2 BG UTI Ch EI E a AARAA AAAA ANA AA AAN AA ANANA AEN AA AAAA AEN AAE A A 3 1 SAE NN aae T E uocctesuatedce tebasdanenes 372 Sele POCO
9. BIOS for AGS 3328 2 3 6 Advanced configuration With AGs 3328 2 3 please make sure that the following BIOS parameters are set as given below Main Boot Options Advanced Peripheral Confguration Advanced System Confguration Power APM Power Saving ACPI Save To RAM Power On Off Quiet Boot Primary Display Boot Sequence Serial ATA Confguration LAN Controller Audio Controller Graphics Aperture Disabled Disabled LAN Power Failure Recovery Disabled PCI VGA Diskette CD ROM Drive Hard Drive Legacy LAN Card S ATA Interface Disabled Disabled Disabled 32M Disabled Disabled Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt lt 6 21 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 11 BIOS settings for rendering machines In a distributed system that is delivered with X server release 3 48 or newer the BIOS of the mainboards of the rendering processors is already configured to enable Wake On LAN WOL If you want to check the settings or if it is necessary to enable WOL for another reason e g if you want to use the onboard LAN adapter and to remove the rendering network cards with Etherboot mechanism please refer to section 3 2 13 Network you can do the following provided that you have a model of a Processor with order number 0S 3026 5 EOS 3327 2 Of AGS 3328 2 OF higher e Switch off the complete TRANsForm A system please refer to section 3 3 3 Switching off
10. Standard The synchronization modes Hsync Vsync Csync and Sync on Green are supported Connectors The DUAL RGB INPUT CARD has two VGA compatible 15 pin SubMinD connectors Each is for connecting one RGB Signal to TRANSFORM A RGB In 1 I a un RGB In 2 l Figure 3 32 connector of DUAL RGB INPUT CARD Order Within a single DUAL RGB INPuT Card the numbering of the video channels is as shown in the figure above For the order in that the input cards are inserted into TRANSForm A please see section 3 2 7 Quad Analog Video Card Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the DUAL RGB Input Caro please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____ 3 28 3 Getting started 3 2 12 Multiport 1 0 card The Multiport 1 0 Card extends the system with additional serial connectors They may be helpful for controlling multiple devices through the control room management software Osiris Connectors The Multiport 1 0 Card has two serial sockets 1 1st serial port 2nd serial port Figure 3 33 Multiport 1 0 Card Order The Multiport 1 0 Card is inserted in an PCI slot of the Processor Up to three Multiport 1 0 Cards can be used in a PROCESSOR Q Inserting a Multiport 1 0 Card in an OmniBus or Extender is not supported Multiport I O Card i I PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 Figure 3 34 Position of
11. see option ddviPreset above SECUN DID VAIS SIMBIOS 72D IBN TE S ara Sets the names of the video card appearing in the video cards menu 64 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first video card and so on IKE il see option ddviBoardNumber above SELG Channel 1 Channel 2 Sets the names of the adapters of the first video card appearing in the channel menu 2 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on SERN Channel 1 Channel 2 Sets the names of the adapters of the 64 video card appearing in the channel menu 2 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on wae i see option ddviBoardChannelNumber above Sic IRG Live see option ddviPlayMode above Table 4 33 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______LLLLL 4 49 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo Class concerning the Dual RGB Input Card option drgb red drgb green drgb blue drgb brightness drgb reduction drgb preset drgb boardMenu drgb boardNumber drgb boardChannelMenul drgb boardChannelMenu128 drgb boardChannelNumber drgb playMode argument default meaning double Oya see option drgbRed above double OARS see option drgbGreen above double CRS see option drgbBlue above double Ore see option drgbBrightnes
12. 11 12 13 14 15 16 C5 O CON O 10 Data1 Data1 Data1 Shield 5V Power Ground return for 5V Hot Plug Detect red GND green GND blue GND 5V Power GND CON A UU Bh WN 11 12 13 14 15 7 Technical appendix Data2 Data2 Data2 Shield DDC Clock DDC Data Figure 7 2 DVI D connector DDC data Hsync Vsync DDC clock Figure 7 3 CRT connector 7 Technical appendix OmniScaler digital in 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 GND shield return for 5V GND GND GND GND GND 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 1 Datai 1 Data1 1 Clock 1 Clock 1 Hot Plug detect 1 LED PGA Scaler detect 0 LED PGA 0 Hot Plug detect 0 Clock 0 Clock 0 Data1 0 Data1 D D On Oo n O oO 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 16 15 1 Data0 1 Data0 1 Data2 1 Data2 Int Scaler 0 Data2 0 Data2 0 Data0 0 Data0 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 15 14 13 12 11 aon WO N W A UI GND GND 1 DDC clock 1 DDC data GND 0 DDC data 0 DDC clock GND GND Table 7 15 Dual DVI connector digital in OmniScaler digital out 46 GND shield return for 5V Hsync and Vsync 47 48 49 GND 50 51 52
13. Enabled Config mode o Manual lt Dhcp Bootp Primary name domain eos core Aliases opt IP address 192 168 60 254 Netmask opt Fiber eyo re lepace ps pe Y Net device eth1 v Kernel module e1000 I 0 port Copt Irq opt Y Adaptor 3 v Accept Help Figure 3 56 Confirm your changes with Accept or leave with Cancel Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1_1__1__1__1__1_1_W 3 51 3 Getting started Keyboard Select Control Features The Features tab opens Here is the keyboard map that provides the different keyboard types You have also the possibility to choose the language in which the dialogs are held Hit Accept when fin ished Time optional If TRANSFORM A is just used as X terminal it does no date amp time related processing Select Control Date amp Time Adjust TRANSForm A to your time and confirm with Accept User accounts optional As TRANSFORM A comes preconfigured with user lt mmt gt and password lt mmt gt usually defining an additional user account is not required Select Config Users accounts Normal User accounts This will open the Users accounts tab If you have more than 15 accounts on the system Linuxconf will provide you with a filter screen You can use this to select a smaller range of accounts than the full list To get the full list select Accept without changing any of the
14. Encoding Signal Fps Figure 4 4 Xvideo control panel Set contrast of video display Set brightness of video display Set saturation of video display Start video display Freeze video display Select video card the cards can be renamed Select video channel of the Quan ANALOG VIDEO Caro max 4 channels the channels can be renamed Shows the detected video standard PAL NTSC SECAM Select recording standard VHS default S VHS S VHS only available with a QuAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD FRG 3292 Select the frame rate FULL HALF default Table 4 8 Configuration of the video display In the Control Panel you can adjust the video display regarding contrast saturation and brightness etc The video client can store these settings as well as the selected video channel in a configuration file From the File menu you can choose to save the current configuration or read in other A certain configuration file can also be invoked as an option on the command line when starting the video client Please refer to section 4 6 5 The options Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1__ 4 22 4 Operating Control Panel for Streaming Video Card FE xvideo control panel Figure 4 5 Xvideo control panel STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 left and STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 2 right C Set contrast of video display not available ifan scn_dec stream is selected
15. Introduction 1 4 Online manual On the CD TransForm A Documentation amp Supplement for X Terminal OVT 2686 7 this manual DOC 3265 2 can also be found in electronic form Insert the CD in the DVD ROM drive to view the manual If autorun is enabled on the computer the start page of the CD comes up automatically On a Linux computer you may first need to mount the CD by using the following command mount dev cdrom mnt cdrom and then to open the start page index htm of the CD manually On this start page you will find a link to the user s manual of TransForm A X Terminal Acrobat Reader can be used to view the file Adobe Acrobat Reader is free and freely distributable software that lets you view and print Adobe Portable Document Format PDF files If Acrobat Reader is already installed the manual can be viewed just by a click on the respective link Else the Acrobat Reader must be installed first The required installation files can also be found on the CD Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1 8 2 Summary 2 Summary This chapter gives an overview about the features of TRANSForM A X Terminal Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 1 2 Summary 2 1 Properties TRANSFORM A was designed to control large modular OverView display walls Its multi screen capability allows you to control displays of virtually
16. SXGA 1280x1024 15 16 40 10 2 2 5 SXGA 1280x1024 20 16 53 7 2 1 3 UXGA 1600x1200 10 16 39 10 2 2 5 UXGA 1600x1200 15 16 58 6 2 1 3 UXGA 1600x1200 20 16 77 5 2 1 2 2K 2048x2048 10 16 84 4 1 1 2 2K 2048x2048 15 16 126 3 1 1 2K 2048x2048 20 16 168 2 1 1 XGA 1024x768 10 24 24 16 2 4 8 XGA 1024x768 15 24 36 11 2 2 5 XGA 1024x768 20 24 48 8 y 2 4 SXGA 1280x1024 10 24 40 10 2 2 5 SXGA 1280x1024 15 24 59 6 2 1 3 SXGA 1280x1024 20 24 79 5 2 1 2 UXGA 1600x1200 10 24 58 6 2 1 3 UXGA 1600x1200 15 24 87 4 2 1 2 UXGA 1600x1200 20 24 116 3 7 1 2K 2048x2048 10 24 126 3 1 1 2K 2048x2048 15 24 189 2 1 1 2K 2048x2048 20 24 252 1 A Table 4 5 size of video RGB data and number of displayable video windows in case that only this type of video window is displayed Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 4 16 4 Operating 1 SECAM only with Quan ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD and STREAMING VIDEO CARD 2 Overall configuration has to be considered 3 For QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD and Duar DVI INPuT CARD respectively To calculate the bandwidth for windows of different sizes or frame rates the following formula can be used B res res fr cd The abbreviations have the following meaning e res res resolution of the source in x and y direction in pixels It is important to consider the final scaling used to display the window Up scaling of the input sources
17. ___ 6 16 6 Advanced configuration Enter the IP address and netmask for the team virtual adapter This is in general the same IP that was indicated in the system configuration Enter ip address for virtual adapter 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 Enter netmask for virtual adapter 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Chosen values Virtual adapter members ethoO ethl IP address 150 158 181 176 Net mask SRO ne ee nor ann Are you sure y n y KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK BARCO iANS Configuration completed successfully KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKK When confirming the selected values with y the AFT team will be configured else you will exit the script without changes Revoking an AFT team The members of an AFT team can be released as well To achieve this log in as root and change to the directory otp MMT2686 ians like explained above and run the script unconfig root eos ians unconfig After confirming to unconfigure the AFT team with y the script revokes the team The network adapters of the team get the same IP address and netmask they had before building the team You want to continue Y n y unconfig done Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 6 17 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 8 Mapping of USB devices hot plug detection The Processor supports hot plug det
18. ctrl iconic followMouse activeGrabber argument default meaning SEE xvideo control panel see option ctrlTitle above CEE aO a O see option ctr1Geom above bool true see option ctrlVisible above bool false see option ctrlIconic above boo true see option followMouse above bool true see option activeGrabber above Table 4 27 Resources of the XVideo class concerning the canvas panel option Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas Canvas display title geometry iconic maxSize minSize ratioAspect AllowResize noBorder backGround argument default meaning SG 16 Lae SDISPLAY see option canvasDisplay above SEEING xvideo canvas panel see option canvasTitle above Sir laG TOO ROROA OR LUO see option canvasGeom above poo false see option canvasIconic above S LG Ox0 allows to limit the maximum size of the canvas panel 0x0 is unlimited SE 0x0 allows to limit the min size of the canvas panel 0x0 is unlimited bool true see option ratioAspect above bool true see option allowResize above bool false see option noBorder above bool blue see option canvasBackground above Table 4 28 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111 445 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo class concerning module video and module RGB option moduleVideo moduleGeo
19. specified Select the type of the used keyboard with the arrow keys and confirm OK If you press Cancel a key board of us type becomes installed by default Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____1__1__1_1_1 63 6 Advanced configuration Figure 6 3 The configuration of the keyboard is reported Figure 6 4 The second configuration item is the network configuration Pressing the Yes button enables to insert an individ ual IP address and netmask Pressing the No button configures the default IP address 192 168 0 1 Figure 6 5 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 6 4 6 Advanced configuration To set up networking enter the IP address and netmask and if needed a default gateway and the primary name server and confirm with OK If in doubt about the network settings ask your network administrator for the values When navigating through the dialog and leaving empty the fields for the default gateway or primary name server there will be default values entered automatically into the empty fields To overcome this the F12 key can be pressed instead of the OK button Configure TCP IP Please enter the IP configuration for this machine Each item should be entered as an IP address in dotted cdecimal notation for example 1 2 5 4 IP address Hetmask Default gateway IP Primary nam
20. user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 data It is not possible to restart the X server in multi color depth if an other color mode has been configured in the X 11 configuration But if the X server has been configured in multi color depth it can be restarted with the other color depths mentioned above To revert to multi color depth the X server must be restarted in the default mode Please keep in mind that a higher color depth requires also a higher bandwidth for graphic In addition changing the color mode of the X server may change the color mode of video or RGB and lead therefore also to an increase in required bandwidth for video please refer to section 4 2 2 Color capabilities to see which video color mode applies for which X server color mode and to section 4 6 1 The input cards to see the required bandwidth for video and RGB Both effects may lead to a loss of performance WM Policy Auto raise on Auto raise off Click to Focus Focus Follows Mouse Virtual Desktop Virtual Desktop on Virtual Desktop off Window Menu Move Resize Iconify Maximize Normal Un Stick Refresh Raise Lower Next Previous Window list Close Kill Window Manager Restart Fvwm2 Modules IconBox IconMan Ident System tools EOSinfo Event Test Vi Telnet Clocks Analog Digital Shells Bash Bash Big bash Login bash Tcsh tcsh Big tcsh Login tcsh 4 Operating Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages P
21. 1 The Remote Contro l daemon only applicable in an Omnibus configuration Select the first channel of the first QUAD ANALOG VIDEO Caro for genlocking Select the first channel of the first STREAMING VIDEO Caro for genlocking Select the first channel of the first QUAD SDI ViDEO Caro for genlocking Select the first channel of the first DUAL DVI Input CARD for genlocking Select the first UGX or AGX GRAPHIC CARD for genlocking Select the external genlock signal for genlocking Switch genlocking off Switch genlocking on Read and apply the last saved genlock settings Save the current genlock settings and apply them automatically after system restart explained in section 3 2 15 CPU board Q When using genlock make sure that the cabling for genlock has been established as If an external signal is connected only external may be selected If selecting internal or a video signal it will be disturbed by the external signal Therefore the external signal should be unplugged before switching to another type of genlock Configuration Screensaver Default Immediately Blank Pattern after 5 min off Set screensaver to default settings Set screensaver to immediate screensaving Set screensaver to blank display Set screensaver to switch off pattern after 5 minutes Switch screensaver off Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____LLLLLLT 4 9 Mouse fast normal slow
22. 11 August 2008 H 4 15 4 Operating Amount of video and RGB windows The number of video and RGB data that can be processed in TRANSForM A underlies the available bandwidth e In each OmniBus A18 there are 400 MBps available e in an OmniBus A12 the available bandwidth per card is usually at least 200 MBps depending on the overall configuration e Ina Processor configuration the system Processor and EXTENDER together provides 100 MBps and a single PROCESSOR AGS 3390 2 provides 200 MBps respectively The following table gives an overview about the bandwidth required for some standard window sizes In the last four columns there are in addition the maximal values for windows of that source type in the four different de vice types OmniBus A18 input card in OmniBus A12 Processor configuration and Processor AGS 3390 2 These values are valid if only windows with the specified properties are displayed type number of frame color bandwidth max amount of windows per pixels bate gent po OmniBus A18 input cardin Processor Processor fps bpp pena OmniBus Configuration AGS 3390 2 ps A12 NTSC 640x480 30 16 19 21 4 2 5 10 PAL SECAM 720x540 25 16 20 200 472 5 10 HDTV 720p 1280x720 25 16 47 8 2 2 4 HDTV 720p 1280x720 30 16 56 7 2 1 HDTV 1080i 1920x1080 25 16 104 3 22 HDTV 1080i 1920x1080 30 16 125 3 2 1 XGA 1024x768 10 16 16 25 2 6 12 XGA 1024x768 15 16 24 16 2 4 8 XGA 1024x768 20 16 32 12 2 3 6 SXGA 1280x1024 10 16 27 15 2 3 7
23. 12 13 14 15 16 17 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 o 0o00 o O O O O I I I i I O O O O O O O O O I Ii IH H 1 T cUe ee ee oe oe oe Oe N we wo F 4 d o S Y S YF Y by S Veuve vee Sny gt 01234 G G G 5 6 7 8 sa le 13 14 15 16 17 000000000 I I i OmnIBus 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 o pes N o A ol a N h PCI G G G GQ GQ G GA G G G G PROCESSOR Figure 3 50 large monolithic system configuration One Processor that connects to four OmniBus devices controls the wall OmniBus 1 is solely filled with graphic cards and does therefore not directly provide data for the wall OmniBus 2 3 and 4 contain the OmNISCALERS and input cards and some further graphic cards and provide the final display data for the projection modules The video output of each OmniBus can be displayed on its respective display area but can not be moved into another display afed Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 43 3 Getting started Large distributed system The following system has 72 channels digital output and a configuration that enables either 20 fre
24. 2 2 4 12 overscan OPON sat ates cach recat tan eatd da casescamehisectasatatncoesesens 4 40 OVENI Woe E E A 2 2 OULANG EMCI saa on eee 3 61 ASSIGMMMEME eresian aa 3 18 Remote COMTO coina e a R 4 52 Remote Control client 4 53 OverView mD Remote Control client 4 57 OverView mL Remote Control client 0 4 56 OverView mP Remote Control client 0 4 58 FF PAL ee silencio bas A Naeem anna 4 16 parameters Of X SEIVEL occ eeesccscescesecssceseesseeseens 6 9 DAS SW OG nine E 3 49 PCI slots AO CIUON G e222 sas ee east ca oe aee tect aau a eadeeeece 3 13 numbering on Extender ou ee eseseeseeeeeeees 3 14 numbering ON OMNIBUS A12 ou eee eeeeeee 3 9 numbering on OMNIBUS A18 eeeeeeeeeees 3 12 numbering ON Processor cceceeseeseesseseeseeseeeee 3 6 Order Extender uo eee cece ceeesesseeeeseeeeees 3 38 order IMPUL CAl GS erensia 3 22 order multiport 1 0 card wo eee eeeeeteeseeeeees 3 29 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1__1__1__1__1_ 9 3 order Proces SO nren 3 36 PCle slots numbering ON PFOCESSOL ccceseseesseseeseeseeeees 3 6 PLL D VIGEL ee ceeccccscescesecescesscssceseesseesceseenseeseens 4 36 PON Silicon ECD sonen 2 2 power CD MING eaa 3 15 GISCOMME CT Ssdicsncordneswmenaceshookenvansmanssesincamocceseeess 5 4 DOWEL CONG eea 1 5 EELE AEE AANA N T AE AES 1 4 DOW Ch DULUOM asoras cota sect
25. 20 21 24 25 28 29 32 aT i l l l i i i i l l e e e e e e e e g g 7 e e e e e e e e PCI9 PCI10 PCI11 PCI12 PCI13 PCI14 PCI15 PCI16 PCI17 CPU link PCIO PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 PCI7 PCI8 board slot Figure 3 43 Example for the numbering in a configuration with three OmniBus devices of a monolithic system Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 37 3 Getting started 3 2 17 Extender Connecting to the Processor The data connection between Processor and EXTENDER is established with a link interface card in the Processor and in the EXTENDER which are connected with a round cable Figure 3 44 Round cable to connect PROCESSOR and EXTENDER The cable between Processor and Extender is fragile It may not last under tension or being bent or twisted The link interface cards consume one PCI slot in the Processor and in the EXTENDER Order The connection card is inserted in the PCI slot with the lowest numbers A PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 Figure 3 45 Connection card to the EXTENDER Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 3 38 3 Getting started Order of graphic and input cards In a configuration with an ExTeNDER the numbering of the graphic cards and QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARDS STREAMING VIDEO CARDS QUAD SDI VIDEO CARDS DUAL DVI
26. 2400 E Cornet iVDO Streamer 2 4 Encoder Cornet iVDO Streamer 2 4 Encoder DVTeL 7601e Exterity A V server GE Security Visiowave Discovery 2400 Discovery 300 Visiobox Evolution HD HaiVision Hai210 Hi Tron e Videoserver iMPath 11000 iMPath i4000 IndigoVision VideoBridge 8000 881 8000 882 IndigoVision VideoBridge 8000 882 JVC VN C655U LANACCESS onSafe MPEG2 LANACCESS onSafe MPEG4 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 Operating compression IP Skip bytes Skip bytes Stream TCP PID algorythm protocol at start at end protocol h263 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0 No on board RCP support I frame distance may not be 0 Startstring example VIP X h263 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 No on board RCP support I frame distance may not be 0 mpeg2 RTP 4 0 auto OFF 0 No on board RCP support mpeg4 UDP auto OFF mpeg2 UDP auto OFF mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0 Use port 3000 for TCP Startstring example SmartSight mpeg2 RTP UDP 0 4 0 auto OFF 0 IP protocol for Transport UDP UDP for Transport RTP and Elementary RTP SkipAtStart for Elementary 4 else 0 2D wavelet UDP 0 0 auto ON 0 Use the encoder TCP port for TCP Startstring example Visiobox Signaling method is TCP signaling is supported mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 No usage of Advanced simple profile Encoder must
27. 3 Order codes Two adapters are in the scope of delivery RCA connectors 3xRCA to DVI A adapter cable see section 7 3 Order codes and for connection below BNC connectors 5xBNC to DVI A adapter see section 7 3 Order codes and for connection below Table 3 3 Adapters and cables for DuAL DVI INPUT CARD Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______ 3 26 3 Getting started The connection of analog signals is according to the table below Color of wire RGB Composite S Video Component Y YC YPrPb red R Y Y Pr green G y blue B C Pb black only on BNC adapter cable V SYNC gray only on BNC adapter cable H SYNC Table 3 4 Connection of analog signals to Duat DVI INPUT CARD Order Within a single DuaL DVI INpuT Card the numbering of the video channels is as shown in the figure above For the order in that the input cards are inserted into TRANSForm A please see section 3 2 7 Quad Analog Video Card Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the DUAL DVI INpuT Carb please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 3 27 3 Getting started 3 2 11 Dual RGB Input Card The DuAL RGB Input Caro provides the capability of displaying RGB monitor signals Two analog signals up to 1280x1024 75Hz are digitized for further processing in TRANSFORM A
28. 6 5 Figure 3 6 numbering of expansion slots on the back panel of the PROCESSOR AGS 3328 2 3 left or AGS 3389 middle or AGS 3390 2 right above may not be used for input cards due to mechanical requirements In a configuration where all PCI slots are used the input card may be inserted into the PCI slot of an Q With AGS 3390 2 in Processor configuration the PCI slot no 5 as numbered in the figure OmniScaler instead In the following sections reference is taken to the numbering of the slots Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ _ 3 6 3 Getting started 3 1 2 OmniBus A12 Each OmniBus A12 provides twelve PCI expansion slots They can be used for Barco s UGX GRAPHIC CARDS OMNISCALERS QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARDS DUAL DVI INPUT CARDS DUAL RGB INPUT CARDS STREAMING VIDEO CARDS and Quan SDI VIDEO CARDS Although the backplane of the OmniBus A12 is based on standard 64bit 66MHz PCI bus it is highly recommended to not insert other cards than those mentioned above Other cards will not work due to the missing driver support and there is also a risk to damage the OmniBus A12 or the inserted cards The front ventilation flap with air supply lock of ventilation flap On Off switch green LED power on on power is switched on mh WN off power is switched off 5 buzzer reset button power module failed 6 red LED standby component fail
29. A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______ _ 4 18 4 Operating 4 6 3 The Xvideo client For displaying videos and RGB signals on the display wall an X client is available The client is called xvideo and handles all inputs from QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD and DUAL RGB INPUT CARD The video client xvideo can be started as follows xvideo lt option gt After xvideo is started two windows show up the control panel and the canvas panel The control panel of fers controls for customizing the display whereas the canvas panel displays the video or RGB data The video client detects automatically what kind of signal is connected to channel 1 Figure 4 3 Xvideo client control and canvas panel The video client offers up to four tabs for QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD and DUAL RGB INPUT CARD depending on the actual hardware configuration of your TRANSFORM A The options for starting the video client xvideo are listed in section 4 6 5 The options An important option is described below Module Video and Module RGB Module video and module RGB All input cards allow to start the video client xvideo with an option for displaying the input signal without bor ders and fitted to complete projection modules 1 to nxn depending on configuration The command xvideo mv 1 mg 1x1 1 0 lets the video client start as
30. A in section 3 4 Configuration software Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111111 3 47 3 Getting started 3 3 3 Switching off To switch off TRANSFoRM A save your work remove any disk or CD from the drives and exit from any application Terminate the X Server log on as root and enter shutdown h now for shutting down of shutdown r now for rebooting eos root shutdown h now When TraAnsForm A has shut down it switches off automatically To avoid any complications it is recommended to switch off TransForm A in the way explained above The order in which you switch off central processor and rendering machines is insignificant If TransForm A is switched off as explained above not all parts are disconnected from the power supply To disconnect the whole device the power switches of all OmniBus devices Extender and Processor must be switched off and all power plugs of the devices have to be pulled out after switching off Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____ 3 48 3 Getting started 3 4 Configuration software TRANSFORM A comes to you with installed and pre configured software Nevertheless before you put TRANSFORM A into operation you have to run through a system configuration to insert the properties of your network like the IP address and the keyboard type Furthermore an X 11 configuratio
31. By means of the options the color mode can be determined If the utility is called without option the X server settings that were assigned in the X 11 configura tion are applied Thus the utility enables to change the color mode without the necessity to run through the X 11 configuration The following options are available option meaning pseudo Restart X server in PseudoColor mode 8 bpp true Restart X server in TrueColor mode 16 bpp direct Restart X server in DirectColor mode 16 bpp true32 Restart X server in TrueColor mode 32 bpp direct32 Restart X server in DirectColor mode 32 bpp Table 4 53 options of service mmtserv To restart the X server in TrueColor mode with 32 bpp color depth the following input would be necessary service mmtserv true32 Alternatively the X server can by restarted by means of the entries in the work menu of the window manager please refer to section 4 5 Window manager Q Please keep in mind that a higher color depth requires also a higher bandwidth for graphic data In addition changing the color mode of the X server may change the color mode of video or RGB and lead therefore also to an increase in required bandwidth for video please refer to section 4 2 2 Color capabilities to see which video color mode applies for which X server color mode and to section 4 6 1 The input cards to see the required bandwidth for video and RGB Both effects may lead to a loss of performance It is not possible t
32. CARD with sources of type 3 4 5 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 6 4 Operating 4 3 X Display manager The X display manager xdm is a system process which manages a user session from the login to the logout The xdm provides a flexible and configurable method for logging in with an X server The xdm can be configured such that X 11 clients are started automatically The X server is reset for the next login following each user log out X display manager of TransForm A The X display manager comes pre installed with the system on TRANSForM A Depending on the actual configura tion the xdm is started automatically and opens a chooser box offering all possible xdm hosts accessible by TRANSFORM A On TRANSForm A there are manual pages about the xam available For reading these man pages enter man xdm in the command line eos root man xdm X display manager of host computers The X display manager for the host computers of TRANSForM A is not included in the delivery of TRANSFORM A Further documentation The X display manager is documented in e X Window System Administrators Guide Volume 8 O Reilly amp Associates Inc This document specifically describes all configuration possibilities for the X display manager using corresponding files Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1_1__1__1__1_1_ 4 7 4 O
33. DUOOTOONUODOODOOTINTUNTOONO0I ONOONOONOODOOUOO NOUNOU TONON Channel 1 4 YM Channel 5 8 Figure 6 13 In the above example eight different videos can be displayed simultaneously channel 12 3 45 67 8 Note The number of video channels is not defined in the comment line but by the number of entries fol lowing the rendering machines names Four videos can be displayed on the left part of the display wall by the four adapters of the first rendering machine engine 1 The other videos can be displayed on the right part of the display wall by the four adapters of second rendering machine engine 2 A configuration of the same system that enables two logical video channels could look like this Rendering 1 Rendering 2 video 2 4 channel 12 3 4 5 6 engine l 123 40 0 Tm Ti engine 2 003412 Channel 1 2 N eee Channel 3 4 Channel 5 6 Figure 6 14 In the above example two video channels channel 3 and channel 4 are logic video channels They can be displayed and moved over the complete display wall One logical video channel is setup with the adapters 3 of both rendering machines the other logical video channel is setup with the adapters 4 of both rendering ma chines Channel 1 2 5 and 6 can be displayed within the left part of the display wall respectively within the right part only The control panel of the video client
34. INPUT CARD and DUAL RGB INPuT CARDS follows the order implicitly given by the EXTENDER and its interconnection The OMNISCALERS are numbered according to the graphic cards they are con nected to Numbering begins at slot PCI 1 of the Processor As soon as an EXTENDER is connected numbering continues with the PCI slots of this EXTENDER After that the remaining slots of the Processor are numbered The numbering is illustrated in the figure below Processor PCI Segment 0 Exten Graph Graph der Card Card 1 1 N7 iL T PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 Extender Dual Quad Omni Omni Omni Omni RGB Analog Scaler Scaler Scaler Scaler Input Video Card 1 Cardi 4 ZIN PCIO PCI6 PCI5 PCI4 PCI3 PCI2 PCI1 PCI7 PCI6 PCI5 PCI4 PCI3 PCI2 PCI1 PCI Segment 2 PCI Segment 1 Figure 3 46 Example for the numbering in a configuration with an EXTENDER Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 39 3 Getting started 3 2 18 Example configurations The examples below cover different kind of configurations to show the different possibilities of setups and con nections The following abbreviations are used e G graphic card e 0 OMNISCALER e I input card i e QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD DUAL RGB INPUT CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD or STREAMING VIDEO CARD The schematic drawings of the TRANSForm A devices show always the
35. Module Video mv 1 on the second projection module from the left in the upper row mg 1x1 1 0 The displayed video or RGB signal is always on top other applications are beyond and can not be manipu lated by accident File menu File Read Xvideo Config File Read Xvideo configuration file RGB Preset File Read RGB preset file SVC Stream Preset File Read stream preset file Save Xvideo Config File Save Xvideo configuration file RGB Preset File Save RGB preset file SVC Stream Preset File Save stream preset file Save As Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ 1_ Y__1__1__1__1__1__1__ 4 19 Xvideo Config File RGB Preset File SVC Stream Preset File Exit Pref Save On Exit Canvas RGB Set Remote Display On Off Remote Pointer Map Unmap Remote Keyboard SVC Board Settings Stream Settings DDVI Read EDID Structure from DDVI Write EDID Structure to DDVI Overscan Set Default Set Manual View Close Canvas Panel Iconify Canvas Panel Raise Canvas Panel Close Control Panel Help 4 Operating Save Xvideo configuration file to another path or file name Save RGB preset file to another path or file name Save stream preset file to another path or file name Quit video client Save not save configuration on quitting the video client With multiple logical screens the
36. Multiport 1 0 Card in an Processor AGS 3389 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 29 3 Getting started 3 2 13 Network Network adapters With TRANSForM A the following network adapters are available The onboard LAN adapters on the mainboard the Ethernet Card 100 Mbps as well as the Ethernet Card 1000 Mbps These adapters are used to connect the Processor to the LAN local area network and to connect central device and rendering machines to the sub net The sub net connection is established via a Gigabit Ethernet Switch see section 3 2 14 Distributed system Redundant network connection For a redundant connection to the LAN the Ethernet Card 100 Mbps as well as the Ethernet Card 1000 Mbps are also available as server adapters allowing to configure them in teaming mode sharing one single IP address On the label on the card is indicated whether a network card is of server or desktop type The onboard LAN adapters of the PROCESSOR AGS 3390 2 can also be used to configure teaming mode Please refer also to section 6 1 7 Redundant network adapter for more information PCI and PCI Express network adapters The Ethernet Card 100 Mbps is available only as PCI card the Ethernet Card 1000 Mbps is available as PCI card and as PCI Express card Models The various models of network adapters allow different usage The following table gives an overview about this possi
37. QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB DDVI for source types 3 4 Meaning increment decrement brightness red for DDVI source 3 increment decrement contrast green for DDVI source 3 increment decrement saturation blue for DDVI source 3 increment decrement red increment decrement green increment decrement blue reset color selections select input card 1 n select input channel 1 4 select input channel 1 2 VHS S VHS select preset 1 n auto preset selection toggle frame rate between full and half frame rate set reduction value 0 255 for DDVI 0 15 for DRGB select QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD folder select DUAL RGB INPUT CARD folder select QUAD SDI VIDEO Caro folder select STREAMING VIDEO CARD folder select Duar DVI INPuT CARD folder live video still video stop video iconify canvas panel dismiss canvas panel toggle help menu exit video client Table 4 7 keyboard shortcuts to control video QAVC QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD QSDI QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD SVC STREAMING VIDEO CARD DDVI DUAL DVI INPUT CARD DRGB DUAL RGB INPUT CARD Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt lt 4 21 4 Operating 4 6 4 Displaying video and RGB signals Control Panel for Quad Analog Video Card C B S Live Still QAVC 1 Channel 1
38. SS OM ae A cat rears eee ace cease caret Otc cient teeter A 32 Se eZ OBS Za a EN a N a a 3 7 SS OMNIBUSA To ounan aa a a a a a a ean euoneuetanens 3 10 AEN a E E Ae oe RTD ee OP ee en 3 13 PCD MN secesteress Saltash as aa ate ga tela enh eae cts aah alee a all Moneta tata taht 3 15 LEPOON E UB D by aera tence ner ner E nO Re eee EE ne P 3 15 D2 2 MOUS Cricri a T E A A A 3 15 Be PD CE Ba ST E EAEE IPAE T A EE NEIE TAA E EE AE IEA E E E 3 15 PLAK YBO EERS A 3 16 BZ PAC CI r A wea me ce ne 3 17 BZ 6 OMS CANE aaa E A A 3 20 2227 Oa ANINO VIGCO Cal Case ie ET eal cat used ine een cea ahs aa deseo Gauenaaasaene 3 22 Cpe sNews tere UALR Ip A 4 oem Oro Pee nee eae ener Oem E E E en EE A eee ener 3 23 8 229 OlldG SOI VIGGO CAd anuna a EA danas gusseansamcennuees 3 25 32 10 Dual DVI DUT CONG NR 3 26 ye a DUP OBANDO cx Or came en ee ln RO OT a eer Mr ee meee 3 28 B22 MUDO OCI A rositae anaa asec eda oeae E ad ea a 3 29 GZS NONNO AT A E AA E 3 30 2TA DE DUtEd SyS 2 RB ene NOR OD TO 3 33 Be Me ele UO O E E AE E AEEA E nae onset 3 34 DZ LOODUS eroa a 3 36 De Zed PENJE o E R 3 38 3 218 Example COMMGULATONS semara a r E E S 3 40 JOSING UD sann A S O A A E EA 3 46 De eC OMB CINO meaa e E 3 46 3 3 2 SWITCHING Osennii a a I a A A A 3 46 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 y 3 323 SWICHINO Off naaien n E sea tuugndteaunncesaeeteds 3 48 3A COMMGUEALION SONW al Co saen SN 3 49 BA Sy SUI COLI U
39. To configure TRANSFORM A just insert the configuration disk into the DVD ROM drive or call the corresponding configuration script from the hard disk and perform the configuration as explained in the corresponding sections Although the ext3 file system offers good protection against file system inconsistencies for safely switching off the system has to be shut down first see section 3 3 3 Switching off eXtended safety boot mode With eXtended safety boot mode the hard disk of the TRANSForm A system contains two partitions the working partition and the backup partition eXtended safety boot mode is like normal boot mode also based on the ext3 file system But in addition it offers the possibility to store on the backup partition a backup of the whole system including its configuration A backup with the current state of the working partition can be made at any time and the working partition can easily be restored in case of a miss configuration or failure in operability Please see section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility for details Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 62 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 2 Installing system software on the hard drive Usually TRANSFORM A comes with preinstalled system software In case you want to reinstall the system software or install a new hard disk please follow the instructions in this section Installation Switch on TRA
40. Verbose OF The level of information can be selected 1 is basic information 2 is full information Selecting 0 or omitting verbose provides just a very short description Table 4 52 4 8 2 DDC utility The UGX GRAPHIC CARD and the AGX GRAPHIC CARD supports each the DDC standard DDC stands for Display Data Channel As a standard communication channel between a computer display and a host system it allows to automatically detect the best setting for a DDC capable display by obtaining these parameters from the display itself If the connected display devices support the DDC standard information of this graphic device can be requested as follows ddcinfo No further options are required ddcinfo can only be requested as long as the X server is not running 4 8 3 Boot loader utility When booting a TRANSForm A in eXtended safety mode a graphical menu appears to select the boot partition Please refer also to section 3 3 2 Switching on The boot loader utility helps to change this if wanted Therefore change by using cd to the directory cd opt MMT2686 config To switch on the graphical boot selection use opt MMT2686 config bootgraph on To switch it off use opt MMT2686 config bootgraph off Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1_____ 4 65 4 Operating 4 8 4 Restart X server utility service mmtserv The service mmtserv utility can be used to restart the X server
41. X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ ____6 8 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 5 X server parameters If you want to make changes to the graphical user interface X 11 which are not supported by the configuration tools introduced in section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration you can manipulate the appearance and the properties of X 11 with a number of options On TRANSForm A there are manual pages about the Xserver available For reading these man pages enter man Xserver in the command line man Xserver Additional options are listed in the table below no_cursor_on_video The cursor becomes invisible as long as it is moved over videos ddc_all DDC detection is asked for every graphic channel Each graphic channel needs up to 6 seconds for detection Therefore this should not be used as a standard see section 4 8 2 DDC utility no ddc DDC detection is not done at all DRGB_888 All RGB sources of the DUAL RGB INPUT CARD are digitized and transferred to the OMNISCALER with 24 bpp RGB 8 8 8 instead of the default setting with 16 bpp RGB 5 6 5 Restarting the X server without this option resets the default settings DDVI_888 Sources of type 3 4 of the Duar DVI Input Carb are digitized and trans ferred to the OmNISCALER with 24 bpp RGB 8 8 8 instead of the default setting with 16 bpp RGB 5 6 5 Restarting the X server without this option resets the default settings new_video_la
42. ____1___1__1_ 3 23 3 Getting started Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the STREAMING VIDEO Caro please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1_W1__1__1__1__1 3 24 3 Getting started 3 2 9 Quad SDI Video Card The QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD provides the capability of displaying SDI video signals The digital video signals are proc essed for further usage in TRANSFoRM A Four video signals per QuAD SDI ViDEO CARD can be processed simultane ously Standards The QUAD SDI VIDEO CarD supports the standard SMPTE 259M C 4 2 2 270Mbps only Connectors The QUAD SDI ViDEO CARD has four BNC connectors to connect four SDI sources To each input there is a LED associ ated green LED channel 1 green LED channel 2 green LED channel 3 green LED channel 4 SDI input channel 1 SDI input channel 2 SDI input channel 3 SDI input channel 4 not used wo ON AOU BhWN Figure 3 30 connectors of the Quan SDI VIDEO CARD Order For the order in that the input cards are inserted into TRANSForm A please see section 3 2 7 Quad Analog Video Card Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 3 25 3 Getting started 3 2 10 Dual DVI In
43. a distributed system must be connected with the remote power on off in connector of the CPU board of the OmniBus Multiple OmniBus devices are connected in a daisy chain to their host by connecting the remote power on off out connector of the first OmniBus to the remote power on off in connector of the next OmniBus and so on The remote power on off out connector of the last OmniBus remains unconnected A Figure 3 39 cabling for remote power on off at OmniBus A18 devices Do not mix up the connetors for remote power on off with the mechanically identical connectors of the network adapters Mixing the connectores will cause damage to the system Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____LLL 3 34 3 Getting started Connecting order remote power on off and genlock In general all OmniBus devices that are locked to the same source must be connected to each other by means of the remote power on off cabling Therefore in a distributed system an additional connection is necessary the remote power on off connector 16 on the back of the central Processor must be connected with external genlock loop through in connector 15 on the back of the first rendering Processor The remote power on off out connector of the
44. based eee eseesseseeseeseeseceeceseeseeseesecsecseeseeeeeeeees 4 54 Ad 3 Tine GUUREMOLE CONMULO LICHEN sai ciasssaseg visio iaieacapaleesttses esi aoe dees 4 60 DF CFI OU KOS etena dba sos al dcestnaieat teins has Sessa N icons stench a esses dee tedes 4 64 TTBS a0 0 e ee TON TR TE OO 4 65 ASV SHOW wallin o UUNIEY srna a E A A wane 4 65 A SA ODC UUN tenistom ord o oei O a 4 65 MS DOO oade aV A A ace Ga aco asa O E 4 65 4 8 4 Restart X server utility service mmtsefv eesnesnoonesosneseseenesesesnesesssnesesnsnesesseesesrsssesesrssesesssses 4 66 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility oo cc ccccsecsscssecssesscesecsscsscesecscesecssseseesseeseenes 4 67 4 8 6 Release integrity utility ECOSINO arcsec crs sleet oiecasital acces celal do iital eas oot tals aah eatin teae 4 69 4 8 7 Network reporting Utility procfg oo ee eeccesseseessesecsececssceecsecseceesescsseesecsecsecsecsesessessessesesseeseenes 4 70 AB GOI OCKUTIMILY ern a a a a A a a sieves eas 4 71 By NVAMMECII N CO rasa A E 5 1 Se EXC ANGS Or COMSULVAD C5 isiin a a E oh tus escnadia tata 5 2 5 1 1 Replacing the filter pad Of PrOCESSOM cece ccccsscssesscsscesecsscesecsecesecsscescesscscesscsscesscsscssesscecessensseasens 5 2 5 1 2 Replacing the filter pad of OMNIBUS A12 and Extender oo eee cesecsscesscssccseesscsseesscssccseeseesseeseens 5 2 5 1 3 Replacing a power module Of OMNIBUS A12 oo cee ccccsscsscescesecsscesecssceseessceecsseesseescesees
45. but leave the power switch 35 of the rendering processor on Repeat the following for all rendering processors e Connect a keyboard to the rendering processor e Switch on this rendering processor by its power button 13 at the front e The device starts booting On one channel of the display wall its graphical output is displayed As soon as the system offers to enter the BIOS press the F2 key e Inthe BIOS take care that the following settings are selected Power Power On Off LAN Enabled Power Failure Recovery Previous State e If using the onboard LAN adapter check that its use is enabled in the BIOS Peripheral Configuration LAN Controller Enabled e Save the BIOS settings and exit the BIOS e Switch off the device by its power button 13 at the front e Disconnect the keyboard After configuring all rendering processors you can switch on the whole system again please refer to section 3 3 2 Switching on Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111111 6 22 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 12 Configuration of 1x2 XGA settings TRANSFORM A enables controlling of two display devices from one TRANSFoRM A output Thus one UGX GRAPHIC CARD is able to control eight projection modules altogether This is called 1x2 XGA settings One graphics signal of TRANSForm A contains the display information for two projection modules with XGA resolu tion 1024x768 pixels which results in a tim
46. configuration with 100 MBps the following correlation must be considered 100 MBps B B B With a single Processor AGs 3390 2 with 200 MBps the following correlation must be considered 200 MBps B B B 1 1 1 Bandwidth optimization for video and RGB windows All optimization settings are made by means of the X video client please refer to the section 4 6 4 Displaying video and RGB signals Frame rate For video sources there are two settings with different frame rate reduction factors selectable to optimize the bandwidth usage For RGB sources the static reduction of the frame rate depends on the input mode and the dynamic frame rate reduction is selectable Use the Fps setting for video data and Reduction for RGB data respectively and refer to the subsection Dual RGB Input Card above Color depth RGB sources can be digitized with 16 bpp or with 24 bpp depending on the visual class of the X server Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 17 4 Operating 4 6 2 The video channels For digitalization of the analog digital or streaming video data and of RGB sources a hardware module adapter is necessary Each video and RGB adapter offers one input port Accordingly the QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD the Quan SDI VIDEO Caro as well as the STREAMING VIDEO CARD have four adapters with one port each and the DUAL DVI INPUT CARD and the
47. displaying video 2 64K colors can be displayed Shared and private color cells are available e DirectColor 32bit R 8bit G 8bit B 8bit for displaying video 2 16M colors can be displayed Shared and private color cells are available e TrueColor 16bit R 5bit G 6bit B 5bit for displaying video 2 64K colors can be displayed The possible RGB values in the color map are predefined in equidistant steps Thus it is guaranteed that the whole spectrum of colors is covered e TrueColor 32bit R 8bit G 8bit B 8bit for displaying video 2 16M colors can be displayed The possible RGB values in the color map are predefined in equidistant steps Thus it is quaranteed that the whole spectrum of colors is covered e PseudoCcolor 8bit with NearBy Color Allocation for displaying pure 8 bit applications 2 256 colors out of 256 16M can be displayed Shared and private color cells are available The maxi mum number of shared and private color cells together is 256 NearBy color allocation X clients may exit on an allocation of a shared or private color cell if the color map is already full and the re quested color cell is not included in the color map yet However the NearBy Color Allocation guarantees that each request for a shared color cell returns a color cell whether or not the color map is already full or an entry in the color map matches the request Please refer to section 6 1 9 Nearby color allocation for m
48. figure out the order of the network adapters please refer to section 4 8 7 Network reporting utility procfg To connect the rendering Processors to the sub net also the network interface ethO is used The onboard LAN adapter can be used for this purpose Sub net The Sub net is established via a Gigabit Ethernet Switch The Gigabit Ethernet Switch connects the rendering ma chines and the central device Up to 7 rendering machines and the central device can be connected with one Gigabit Ethernet Switch Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1__1__1__1____1_ 3 33 3 Getting started 3 2 15 CPU board The CPU board controls amongst other the remote power on off mechanism between the OmniBus devices and its host and the transmission of a genlock signal It is part of each OMNIBUS Connectors On the CPU board there are two RJ 45 connectors for connecting the remote power on off cables Do not remove the sheet metal plate The connector behind is reserved for diagnostic purposes remote power on off in i ihe remote power on off out Figure 3 38 connectors of CPU board Connecting order remote power on off Each OmniBus should be connected to its host for the remote power on off mechanism Therefore the remote power on off connector 16 on the back of the host Processor in a monolithic system rendering PROCESSOR in
49. hit Cancel Once you have entered the new password select Accept If you operate TransForm A in eXtended safety boot mode please take care to update the backup partition after successful configuration see section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility Q You have to reboot TransForm A to make changes become effective Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 5 3 Getting started 3 4 2 X 11 configuration For the X 11 configuration of TRANSForm A the script call must be entered in line mode Therefore leave X 11 for configuration purposes with the following keys pressed simultaneously lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Backspace gt It takes several seconds until X 11 terminates completely During that time the display wall is black Then back in line mode log in as root The factory set password for root is barco eos login root Password barco Configuration can be carried out by means of the configuration script EOSconfig To start this script change the directory first eos root ed opt MMT2686 config then execute the script eos opt MMT2686 config EOSconfig EOSconfig will guide you through the configuration You can exit configuration without saving the modifications at any time by pressing simultaneously lt Ctrl gt C Thus all parameters entered up to now were deleted again It is more convenient however to check all data nec
50. integrity of the current installation can easily be checked by means of the eosinfo utility If eosinfo Is entered into the command line all RPM packages that are installed will be returned This may look like the fol lowing list This are the Factory shipped RPM Packages Rel 4 2 0 eosbigcursor 2 4 0 1 eoscfg 2 5 0 1 eoscompatfonts 1 0 1 1 eosconfig 4 2 0 1 eosdiskless 4 2 0 1 eosians 3 4 8 1 eosipc 4 2 0 1 eosmisc 4 2 0 1 eosrctrl 4 1 0 1 eosuser 2 4 0 1 eosutil 4 1 0 1 eosvwm2cfg 4 2 0 1 eosxblink 2 4 0 1 eosxgenlock 4 2 0 1 eosxmc 4 1 0 1 eosxserver dis 4 2 0 1 eosxserver mon 4 2 0 1 eosxtest 2 4 0 1 eosxtrap 2 4 0 1 eosxvideo 4 2 0 1 The EOS System is in a save state If there are RPM packages installed on the hard disk that do not belong to the current release or if there are appendant RPM packages missing this is specially marked in the list and may look like the following This are the Factory shipped RPM Packages Rel 4 2 0 eosbigcursor 2 4 0 1 eoscfg 2 5 0 1 eoscompatfonts 1 0 1 1 eosconfig 4 2 0 1 eosdiskless 4 2 0 1 eosians 3 4 8 1 eosipc 4 2 0 1 eosmisc 4 2 0 1 eosrctrl 4 1 0 1 eosuser 2 4 0 1 eosutil 4 1 0 1 eosvwm2cfg 4 2 0 1 eosxblink 2 4 0 1 eosxgenlock 4 2 0 1 eosxmc 4 1 0 1 eosxserver dis 4 2 0 1 eosxserver mon 4 2 0 1 eosxtest 2 4 0 1 eosxtrap 2 4 0 1 eosxvideo 4 2 0 1 WARNING The following EOS RPM Package s have been altered eosxserver mon 4 2 0 1 e
51. last OmniBus of a rendering machine must be connected to the external genlock loop through in connector 15 on the back of the next rendering PROCESSOR If multiple TRANsForm A systems shall be locked to the same source the remote power on off out connector of the last OmniBus must be connected to the external genlock loop through in connector 15 on the back of the central Processor of the next TRANSForM A system If an external source is used for genlocking it must be connected to the external genlock in connector 17 on the back of the Processor An example of cabling for an external genlock source is given in the figure below external genlock Central Processor Rendering 1 f z S 3 oS a oS a ww TRANSFORM A System 1 Rendering 2 g a a os Central Processor Rendering 1 i E A A i 8 O aa _ sum a B ob w B eg TRANSFORM A System 2 Rendering 2 f Ol Se m Figure 3 40 cabling for remote power on off and external gunlock at OmNIBus A18 devices Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 3 35 3 Getting started 3 2 16 OmniBus Connecting to the host The data connection between Processor and OmniBus is established with a link interface cable It connects the respective link interface card in the Processor 19 24 Figure 3 5 with the link inter
52. line contains the information of one screen but the position must not be indicated With separate screens the cursor is first displayed on screen 0 Moving the cursor out of screen 0 to the right lets the cursor enter screen 1 on the left side It will enter screen 1 on the same ratio of height as it has left screen 0 This can be continued until the screen with the highest number displays the cursor Moving out to the right usu ally brings the cursor again on screen 0 This can be prevented by the keyword NoCursorWrap This keyword can be inserted in any single line of the geometry section 0 2 geometry ma separatescreens S Rendering 0 Rendering 1 Rendering 2 engine O 4x2 bpp 16 cc 5 engine l 1x1 engine 2 2x2 NoCursorwWrap Figure 6 12 Three independent screens in separate mode video This section starts with the keyword video The system stores in this location the configuration of the logical video channels of a distributed system Please refer to section 4 6 2 The video channels for a basic explanation of video channels The video section must not be changed manually but by means of the script EOSconfig see section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system The way the configuration is written in this section is identical to the way you have to spe
53. long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm 4259 1 x 64 bit 3 3 V 5 V PCI edge connector 4 x BNC connector Table 7 9 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11 7 5 Quad SDI Video Card scaler CPU Frame Memory input formats colors video standard bus power supply power consumption operating conditions dimensions connectors Dual DVI Input Card A D converter scaler CPU Frame Memory input colors input formats bus power supply power consumption operating conditions dimensions weight connectors 7 Technical appendix 4 x Silicon Optix sxZX1 for 1 1 or downscaling 64MB SDRAM NTSC 4 2 2 component 13 5MHz Y sampling PAL 4 2 2 component 13 5MHz Y sampling internal data path YUV 4 2 2 16 bit wide SMPTE 259M C 270Mbps 4 2 2 compliant PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 2 3 3 V 0 3 V 12 V 10 12 V 10 5V 1 9 A 3 3 V 1 8 A 12 V 20 mA 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm 1 x 64 bit 3 3 V 5 V PCI edge connector 4 x BNC 1 x RJ45 connector 10 pins not used Table 7 10 2 x Analog Devices AD9888 via scaler algorithm in FPGA for 1 1 or downscaling 64MB SDRAM Dual input mode up to HDTV 1920x1080 60 Hz input analog input Pixel clock up to 170 MHz input digital input Pixel clock up to ca 288 MHz input depending on the Signal Single input mode up
54. of TRANSFoRM A X Terminal from Barco It is divided into nine chapters Introduction explains the structure of the manual itself and the used typographic styles and symbols Safety information is provided concerning the operation of computer systems from Barco Summary gives an overview about the features of TRANSFORM A Getting Started describes the set up of TRANSForM A and provides you with a guide through the software configuration If your TRANSFORM A is already configured within your working place you can skip this chapter and continue with chapter 4 Operating Operating shows the capabilities which TRANSForm A offers displaying graphics and video You are introduced into oper ating the X video client for displaying video and RGB signals and the REmoTE ContRoL client for controlling an OverView display wall Maintenance describes the maintenance of TRANSFORM A Advanced Configuration may provide useful information for reconfiguring the software of your TRANSFORM A Technical Appendix gives tabular overviews about the technical details of TRANsForm A its components and of their interfaces Troubleshooting gives advice if your TRANSFoRM A does not operate properly Index lists the keywords of the manual Chapters pages figures and tables are numbered separately Chapters are indicated by a point syntax lt e g 4 2 3 pages by a dash syntax e g 2 1 as figures and tables are e g figure 5 4 Barco Tr
55. of source timing settings In case of a signal loss a blue window is displayed and the string no signal is shown within the Presets instead of the before used timing Activate auto detect of source position Table 4 15 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11 4 33 of vil lf gt at fs vjel al ef gt alafe oly sla of Input Settings Sync Level Auto Adjustement Position Size Phase PLL Devider Info Registry Clear Name Append Insert Delete Replace Clear all Reload Import Add Clear Select Dismiss Determine the sync level of the signal HV tuning the horizontal vertical sync level SoG tuning the Sync on Green level Auto adjustment of source Position display area of visible RGB signal in the Canvas Panel H horizontal position of first active pixel in steps of two V vertical position of first active line Determine size of visible RGB signal H number of active pixels per line in steps of four V number of active lines Tune phase shift of ADC Determine pixel frequency of RGB input Information about input signal V_Tot number of lines V_Freq frame rate Sync mode of synchronization Clear text box which displays name of current preset Current setting is added to the list of presets 4 Operating Current setting is inserted in the list of presets before the highlighted preset Delete highlighted preset Replace
56. of the dis play is limited to the visual class TrueColor Please refer also to section 6 1 13 Plain video mode In a distributed system plain video mode may also be restricted to a rendering machine Genlock The TransForm A system provides the ability for genlocking Either a video channel of a QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD of a STREAMING VIDEO CARD or a DUAL DVI INPUT CARD the first video channel of a QUAD SDI VIDEO Caro the clock of an UGX or AGX GRAPHIC CARD or an external studio signal can be used as reference signal Basic functionality of genlock is accessible via the window manager please refer to section 4 5 Window manager Access to the complete genlock functionality is explained in section 4 8 8 Genlock utility Q Genlock is available in an OmniBus configuration only Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1 4 13 4 Operating 4 6 1 The input cards For showing information from external sources like video or RGB data on a Barco display wall a set of input cards is provided For integration of video the QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD the QuaAD SDI VIDEO Caro and the STREAMING VIDEO CaRD is available and for RGB data the DUAL RGB INpuT CARD can be used Multiple input cards can be inserted in one device of TRANSFORM A An X video application allows to display the sources connected to the input cards in individual windows on the display wall that can be freely scaled and moved within
57. option must be typed as soon as the 1ilo prompt appears This is dependent on the settings chosen by means of the boot loader utility please refer to section 4 8 3 Boot loader utility Or e When TRANSForm A is running enter into the command line service eosxs with the option restore to boot from the backup partition service eosxs restore In both cases you have to be logged in locally on the TRANsForm A and the X server must not be started Before the restore procedure actually starts date and time of the backup is displayed and you will be prompted to confirm the restore procedure by typing y Following that the TRANsForm A boots from the backup partition After booting it copies back the version of the working partition that is stored on the backup partition to the working partition This means that the currently used working partition becomes overwritten When copying is finished TRANSForM A reboots automatically this time it boots from the working partition and is therewith operable again based on the state of system and con figuration from the time of the backup Whenever booting from the backup partition the content of the working partition becomes overwritten with the backup This means the current content of the working partition gets lost Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 4 68 4 Operating 4 8 6 Release integrity utility eosinfo The
58. or of the brightness OO TO GO es determines the start value of blue or of the saturation d begs Aker ai 1 Determine preset as line number in preset file CI ee ios 123 determine the reduction rate EEEO O determine the level of noise reduction S 5 determine the deinterlace mode I PE 2 film 3 sport 4 advanced 5 auto selection lt filename gt writes from opt MMT2686 etc xvideo edid lt filename gt the edid structure to the Duar DVI INPUT CARD lt filename gt writes current edid structure from DUAL DVI INPUT CARD to opt MMT2686 etc xvideo edid lt filename gt L s 128 1 selects the input card a il selects the adapter on the input card 0 0 LOA 3 0 sources of setting 1 2 0 0 sources of setting 3 4 5 percentage of cut off for overscan Ibsen Sac sea abe select display mode Table 4 23 4 Operating Options concerning Dual RGB Input Card option drgbRed drgbre drgbGreen drgbgr drgbBlue drgbbl drgbBrightness drgbbr drgbReduction drgbrd drgbPreset drgbpr drgbBoardNumber drgbbn drgbBoardChannelNumber drgbbc drgbP layMode drpm argument default meaning T S URE determines the start value of red EA E ln O25 determines the start value of green Or 0 ee lO Oro determines the start value of blue CPSs OES ere leene Ore determine the start value of brightness ORs 6 determine the reduction rat
59. parameters Select Add This will open the User account creation tab The User account creation tab is where you enter all the information on the new account It has a number of fields only the login name is required though filling in the Full name field is strongly recommended Once you have entered the login name and any other desired information select the Accept button If you decide against creating a new user hit Cancel instead Upon hitting Accept the configuration program will prompt you to enter the password There is also a field called Confirmation where you will need to type the password again Passwords must be at least 6 characters in length They may contain numbers as well as a mix of lowercase and uppercase letters Hit Accept when fin ished Changing a user s password optional Select Config Users accounts Normal User accounts This will open the Users accounts window Select the account whose password you wish to change This will open the User information window Select Passwd from the options at the bottom of the screen The configuration software will then prompt you to enter the new password There is also a field called Confirmation where you will need to type the password again This is to prevent you from mistyping the pass word Passwords must be at least 6 characters in length They may contain numbers as well as a mix of lower case and uppercase letters If you decide against changing the password just
60. per window MBps of the Table 4 5 provides bandwidths of the most common content types the proximate formula helps to check the feasibility of a configuration The overall avail able bandwidth when using plain video mode per monolithic system and rendering machine respectively can be assumed as given in the table below Device Available bandwidth OmniBus A12 120 MBps per OmniBus device Processor AGS 3390 1 2 120 MBps Processor AGS 3389 AGS 3328 60 MBps Table 6 6 Available average bandwidth with plain video Usage of one of the 16bpp visual classes setting 2 4 or 5 see above is recommended for plain video 32bpp is only foreseen for special applications as it consumes double the bandwidth of 16bpp Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 6 25 6 Advanced configuration Hardware configuration For best performance the plugging order of expansion cards in the OmniBus A12 should be considered Cabling is explained in the service manual anyhow for plain video mode the following exceptions should be made Having an OmniBus A12 with six or less expansion cards e Only the PCI slots with odd numbers are used e First the graphic cards are inserted in ascending order in each second PCI slot beginning with the PCI slots with the lowest numbers at the very left slot 1 3 5 e The input cards are inserted consecutively in the following slots with odd numbers slot 7 9
61. power consumption operating conditions Interfaces 7 Technical appendix 177mm 440mm 516mm 6 97 in 17 32 in 20 32 in AGS 3328 AGS 3389 177mm 440mm 566mm 6 97 in 17 32 in 22 28 in AGS 3390 2 183mm 482mm 566mm 7 20 in 18 98 in 22 28 in AGS 3328 AGS 3389 183mm 482mm 616mm 7 20 in 18 98 in 24 25 in AGS 3390 2 18 0 kg 39 7 Ibs AGS 3328 2 AGS 3389 0 2 20 5 kg 45 2 Ibs AGS 3328 3 AGS 3389 1 3 22 3 kg 49 2 Ibs AGs 3390 2 100 240V 60Hz 50Hz 400 W 400 W 0 40 Celsius at max 80 humidity non condensing Table 7 1 177mm 440mm 450mm 6 97 in 17 32 in 17 72 in 183mm 482mm 500mm 7 20 in 18 98 in 19 69 in 18 2 kg 40 1Ibs 100 240V 60Hz 50Hz 600 W 0 40 Celsius at max 80 humidity non condensing Table 7 2 267mm 449mm 420mm 10 51 in 17 68 in 16 54 in 270mm 482mm 461mm 10 63 in 18 98 in 18 15 in 19 8 kg 43 7Ibs 21 8 kg 48 1Ibs 100 240V 60Hz 50Hz 600 W 0 40 Celsius at max 80 humidity non condensing Table 7 3 177mm 440mm 450mm 6 97 in 17 13 in 17 72 in 183mm 482mm 500mm 7 20 in 18 98 in 19 76 in 16 5 kg 36 4lbs 100 240V 60Hz 50Hz 400 W 0 40 C at max 80 humidity non condensing 13 PCI slots for expansion cards 1 slot for connecting to the PROCESSOR Table 7 4 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 72 UGX Graphic Card graphic accelerator local CPU resolu
62. power module of OmniBus A12 The OmniBus A12 with redundant hot plug power modules can be connected to three independent power nets If one of the three power modules or a power net is failing you can hear a buzzer alarm that can be reset by push ing the red buzzer reset button 5 at the front of the OmniBus A12 please refer to Figure 3 7 Front view of OmniBus A12 Also the LED standby component failed 6 at the front starts blinking This LED remains blinking as long as the failure persists even if the buzzer reset button has been pressed 23 air supply 24 mains connection 25 LED power status 27 unlock handle bar 28 handle Figure 5 1 Power module on the rear of OmniBus A 12 The defective power module or the failing power net can be located by examining the individual LEDs power status 25 on the back of the device see above If the LED of one power module is off or lightens red while the LEDs of the other two power modules lightens green then the power module with the non green LED is either defective and must be re placed or the power net connected to it has failed Exchange of a redundant power module Take care NOT to remove a power module from the device unless you unplugged its power cord Never touch the contacts on the backside of a power module There is the danger of being harmed by residual voltage Furthermore the operation of the power module might be impacted by impurities Use gloves to remove the power modu
63. sats anher tenbaus centaaseen te 3 26 3 28 WAN aaeeea 2 2 WINdOW MANAGED cceccesceseeeeseessesseseeseeseeeeeeeeees 4 9 WINGOW meni Siete aa E 4 11 WOL Wake on LAN uu ec eceececssceseessceseeseeseeeseenes 6 22 Work MENU soiien e a E TE AS 4 9 MBN Koogan N 4 8 X client displaying video RGB c cece 4 19 X display MANAGEL ccscescessessceeesseesceseesseeseesees 4 7 X display manager ConfiguratiON cc eee 3 57 GEM OC arasina apis RIS 4 8 X MOIO SO eraa ras ut ata aiaetontastia ee 4 8 PIG hee ce cedab sactheteues N 4 8 X server Set color MOE ee cece ceesecesseeeeeees 4 10 4 66 X SEVEL CXTCNSIOMS srasni E a En 4 8 A Server DalaMEtErS iara a EEE aE 6 9 X terminal WINGOW cceccsccesceseesecseeeseeseesseesees 4 9 TNS CMs i A 4 8 KOO e e eons eco tees 4 8 X 11 big mouse cursor configuration 3 55 X 11 window geometry eee eccsseseeseeteeeeeeeeeee 4 42 KO Doa N 4 7 XO INO CK oos cactitentsta a aeentmeaniteaaecund taarauack 4 71 AMC carssh dirs ectsdtia E geo ua tiesiea tncanacaea sd asmnaree uses 4 8 KV Ob seis haces cede eo adeshanicsudidantaeeeeieenes 4 19 RV IGOO CEN tsa dacs vedsesvaitacs NN 4 9 h ALEE E eee LE oes che le ca NELE EE 3 22 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt 9 5
64. shades of gray Shared and private color cells can be allocated e StaticGray can be viewed as a case of GrayScale in which the gray values are predefined and read only no private color cells are available DirectColor is a class of color map in which a pixel value is decomposed into three separate subfields for indexing The first subfield indexes an array to produce red intensity values The second subfield indexes a second array to produce blue intensity values The third subfield indexes a third array to produce green intensity values Shared and private color cells can be allocated e TrueCcolor can be viewed as a case of DirectColor in which the subfields in the pixel value directly en code the corresponding RGB values That is the color map has predefined read only RGB values Further documentation The color management of the X window system is explained in more detail in The Definitive Guide to the X Window System Volume 1 Adrian Nye O Reilly amp Associates Inc Introduction to the X Window System Oliver Jones Prentice Hall Inc Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLLY 4 4 4 Operating 4 2 2 Color capabilities Visual classes For operating TRANSForM A you can use the following combinations of visual class and color depth depending on which kind of application is to be displayed e DirectColor 16bit R 5bit G 6bit B Sbit for
65. ssaa S 4 10 advanced configuration of TransForm A 6 10 AFT adapter fault tolerance uc eeeeeeees 6 16 assignment of video channels ccccseceeeees 6 11 Atlas Remote Control client 4 53 4 58 authorization MECHANISM ccesceseessesseeeeteeees 4 8 DC KCN SCAN ING serosa E N 4 12 background CONFIGUIATION cceeeeteeteeseeseeeees 3 56 DaCKUD Dall URION aessa SN 2 2 backup procedure ceccescesscssceseesscescessesseeseens 4 67 BIOS setting Wake on LAN Qu eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 22 DNK reran a eee ane ee R 4 8 DOOL loader utli cennu 4 65 boot mode normal extended safety c cece 2 2 6 2 SW IE CHING ON aspect sche E NN 3 47 CONV AS DANE leien 4 19 CHANGING a user s password csceeeseeseeeseesees 3 52 channel configuration cce 3 58 3 62 6 13 classes resource FICS cece eeeecceteeteeseeteeeeseens 4 44 CLAIM Gc N Gutta 5 4 color capabilities Overview cc ccccsccseesseeeeees 4 6 COLORE eee ne E en ee Seer 4 3 calorada iuan a A A 4 3 COnNgUa OM A 3 56 color distortions re 6 19 color Management eerccisn ciccssatiecdatistetacedepnecactene 4 3 CONOR Ma Peena TAA 4 3 6 19 color mode of X Sefvef wee eee eceee cesses 4 10 4 66 COM interface oo ceceseesseeseeseeeseeseesseeeeesees 7 15 COMPOSITE Vide Onenen a 3 22 configuration file file MENU eee eeeeeees 4 19 COnfigUration SCHIP 3 a isscdetseradsvanedontondnayieeadean test 3 53 configura
66. the cabinet Stubborn stains may be removed with a cloth lightly dampened with mild detergent solution Never use strong solvents such as thinner or benzine or abrasive cleaners since these will damage the cabinet Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning Never clean the case of an TransForm A device without first disconnecting all power supply cords Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 54 6 Advanced configuration 6 Advanced configuration This chapter provides help for reconfiguring the software of your TRANSFORM A Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt b 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 Software installation and configuration 6 1 1 Boot modes TRANSFORM A can be installed to be operated in normal boot mode or in eXtended safety boot mode eXtended safety boot mode is the recommended boot mode for TRANSFORM A Normal boot mode With normal boot mode the hard disk of the TRANsForm A system is configured to have one partition this is the working partition Underlying is the ext3 file system that offers widely immunity to file corruption in case of power failure or when switching of the system without having performed a system shutdown before A TRANSForM A with normal boot mode offers full write access to the system partition
67. the projection cubes connected to that device The dis play options can be set in a dialog box Quad Analog Video Card Four different VHS video sources can be connected to a QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD and displayed simultaneously Streaming Video Card SVC 1 The STREAMING VIDEO CARD is able to decode and simultaneously display the following formats and amount of video streams MPEG 1 up to 4 streams all resolutions MPEG 2 up to 4 D1 streams or 4 CIF streams MPEG 4 part 2 up to 4 CIF streams or 3 2CIF streams or 1 2 4CIF streams if content is highly dynamic e g action movies it is recommended to decode 1 4CIF stream per board MPEG 4 h263 up to 4 CIF streams or 4 2CIF streams or 4 4CIF streams MJPEG up to 4 CIF streams or 2 4 4CIF streams AXIS 4 CIF streams 75 quality 25 compression MxPEG up to 4 CIF streams or 2 1280x576 streams Visiowave 1 3 D1 streams or up to 4 CIF streams depends on resolution TRANSFORM SCN 1 stream All streams decoded by one card must have been encoded with the same compression algorithm Streaming Video Card SVC 2 The STREAMING VIDEO CARD is able to decode and simultaneously display the following formats and amount of video streams MPEG 2 up to 15 Mbps per stream MPEG 4 part2 up to 8 Mbps per stream Visiowave up to four streams For each stream the STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 2 provides a dedicated DSP Therefore any combination of the above mentioned compression algorithms can be decoded by one ca
68. the start value of saturation ib ae 64 1 selects the video card eee 1 selects the video channel on the card O20 POCO S30 percentage of cut off for overscan ae Seale Live select display mode Table 4 21 argument default meaning PE if selects full 2 or half 1 refresh rate Chae ie OS determines the start value of contrast OO RO Ore determines the start value of brightness ORE WSO Oe determines the start value of saturation lee or ik selects the video card T 1 selects the video adapter on the card Osan TOG O percentage of cut off for overscan inne a lek Live selects display mode Table 4 22 4 39 4 Operating Options concerning Dual DVI Input Card option ddviiInputSignal ddviis ddviRed ddvire ddviGreen ddvigr ddviBlue ddvibl ddviPreset ddvipr ddviReduction ddvird ddviNoiseReduction ddvinr ddviDeinterlaceMode ddvidm ddviDownLoadEdid ddvidle ddviUpLoadEdid ddviule ddviBoardNumber ddvibn ddviBoardChannelNumber ddvibc ddviDirtyEdge ddvide ddviPlayMode Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 argument default meaning Oo wee gt O input switched off 1 Composite 2 S Video 3 RGB Analog 4 YUV Analog 5 RGB Digital Ore FRO OD determines the start value of red or of the contrast OE O OS determines the start value of green
69. walls it can be useful to enlarge the mouse pointer tion factor Configuring the Big Mouse Cursor When using the X Server with high resolution the standard cursors are hard to track for some people Therefore you can define magnified mouse cursors Following magnification factors are available factor 1 standard cursors factor 2 8 magnified cursors Enter the magnification factor 1 2 These are your Input Device settings Cursor size Factor 2 Mouse Protocol ImPS 2 Mouse Device USB dev input mice Everything correct yes no yes yes Settings for the Output Devices Please enter the required settings for Graphic Card Types AGX 3000 or AGX 3281 Output Signal analog or digital Monitor Resolution only for analog devices Refresh Rate Screen Arrangement Graphic card 3 Getting started Indicate the desired magnifica Select the graphic card TRANSFoRM A supports from X server release 3 4 on exclusively the UGX and AGX GRAPHIC CARDS Setting the graphic card type 1 AGX 3000 2 AGX 3281 Enter the graphic card 2 2 Output signal Select the output signal type Configuring the output signal 1 Analog 2 Di ttal Enter the output signal 2 2 Monitor resolution and refresh rate If you have analog output the monitor resolution and the refresh rate has to be specified In case of analog and digital mixed output just the r
70. x1 slot A second PCI Express network card can be in serted into the PCle x16 slot The PCI network cards are inserted into the PCI slot of the Processor with the highest number If several network cards are used they are inserted in PCI slots with consecutive numbers In general they are numbered in ascend ing order for descending PCI slot numbers For the onboard LAN adapters of aGs 3390 2 the left one is ethO and the right one eth1 if no other network adapters are used in the system If network cards and onboard LAN adapters are used commonly in a system the network reporting utility can be used to figure out the order of the network adapters of the system please refer to section 4 8 7 Network reporting utility procfq The system uses by default ethO to connect to the LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN CI PCI PCI PCI PCle PCle PCle P PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 x16 x1 x1 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 Figure 3 36 Network card in the Processor AGS 3389 left and Processor AGS 3328 right Inserting a network card in an OmniBus or Extender is not supported Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 3 32 3 Getting started 3 2 14 Distributed system With the distributed system multiple rendering machines are used In an OmniBus configuration one rendering machine consists of one rendering Processor and one or two OMNIBUS devices Only one of the two
71. 1 In2 to Out 2 cross Of x In1 to Out 2 In2 to Out 1 1 both of 1 b In1 to Out 1 and Out2 2 both of 2 b In2 to Out 1 and Out2 returning the version of the device returning a list and short descriptions of all available com mands Exits the client Table 4 47 Additionally for a HERMES V2A or a HERMES VXA which is equipped with an analog controller for RGB or video sig nals following commands are available command left lt ctrl number gt right lt ctrl number gt up lt ctrl number gt down lt ctrl number gt menu lt ctrl number gt enter lt ctrl number gt lt ctrl number gt lt ctrl number gt Meaning sending left command to analog controller sending right command to analog controller sending up command to analog controller sending down command to analog controller sending menu command to analog controller sending enter command to analog controller sending plus command to analog controller sending minus command to analog controller Table 4 48 If the client is operated interactively it prompts rctrlswitch gt gt The commands can be abbreviated by unam biguous short cuts Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLL 4 59 4 Operating 4 7 3 The GUI Remote Control client An OverVIEW ML or OverViEW MP display wall HERMES V2A HERMES D2D HERMES VXA and Hermes VXD can be controlled with the GUI RemoTE ContROL client The GUI
72. 1589 1595 2114 V_SIZE 1344 1344 1344 1440 1440 1440 1392 1392 1392 1080 1080 1200 1200 1200 1440 1440 1536 1536 1536 2046 Presets for component formats YUV with DUAL DVI INPUT CARD 720x480 30i 720x480 60p 720x576 25i 720x576 50p 1280x720 50p 1280x720 60p 1920x1080 25i 1920x1080 30i c am 5 H l ve es 6 864 720 5 880 720 5 8 2 720 6 896 720 6 1984 1280 7 1 04 1280 7 2664 1920 11 2240 1920 11 V_TOT 25 25 25 50 50 25 25 V_ PERIOD 16666 13333 11765 16666 14286 13333 16666 13888 13333 16666 13333 16666 13333 11765 16666 13333 22222 16680 15152 22222 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 107 38 48 42 53 60 59 60 63 53 59 59 H POS 145 142 156 156 264 292 204 217 H POL SS i ee Aas se eto I Seb J om eo a H POS 528 568 462 474 471 466 522 478 576 494 498 496 499 497 552 502 600 534 534 709 V_POL ee ee eS H POL a a a a a ae SYNC_MODE eS 7 Technical appendix V_POL st eS aS a RORO RFO le See ROOFS TORO Mn a EP ete Fig ea ae FOR ED bs a c Y o Y Y ADC PHASE 22 22 22 Q A 2 2 2 8 WY lt 2 15 15 15 4 15 11 6 9 6 1 1 8 6 Table 7 13 i oye ml 47 15 127 15 127 15 127 15 127 i eo fal a B27 4 15 127 15 127 Table 7 14 7 9 7 2 Interfaces Seen from outside
73. 2 640 520 480 13888 31 168 1 1 24 840 640 500 480 13333 19 184 1 1 8 832 640 509 480 11764 28 136 1 1 24 900 720 449 400 14285 36 154 1 0 16 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 7 7 720x400 85Hz 800x600 56HZ 800x600 60HZ 800x600 72Hz 800x600 75Hz 800x600 85HZ 1024x768 43HzZ 1024x768 60HZ 1024x768 70HZ 1024x768 75Hz 1024x768 85Hz 1152x864 60HZ 1152x864 70HZ 1152x864 75HZ 1152x864 85Hz 1152x900 66HZ 1152x900 76HZ 1280x768 60HZ 1280x768 75Hz 1280x768 85Hz 1280x800 60HZ 1280x900 70HZ 1280x960 60HZ 1280x960 70HZ 1280x960 75Hz 1280x960 85Hz 1280x1024 60HZ 1280x1024 70H7 1280x1024 75H7Z 1280x1024 85Hz 1400x1050 60Hz 1400x1050 70Hz 1600x1200 60HZ 1600x1200 65Hz 1600x1200 70Hz 1600x1200 75Hz 1600x1200 85Hz 1680x1050 60HZ ees A meee I eee OE ee BE ee EE ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee NE ee BE ee EE ee PLL_DIVIDER V_TOT 446 625 628 666 625 631 817 806 806 800 808 895 900 900 907 937 943 994 802 807 994 1000 1000 999 1000 1011 1066 1066 1066 1072 1087 1067 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1304 V_PERIOD 11764 17857 16666 13888 13333 11764 23256 16666 14285 13333 11764 16666 14286 13333 11765 15152 13158 16670 13333 11765 16670 14286 16666 14286 13333 11764 16666 14286 13333 11764 16630 14286 16666 15384 14285 13333 11764 16666 Barco TransForm A X Termina
74. 4 EASI MPX E8 Telindus Cellstack Centauri VBrick VB4000 VB6000 VBrick VBXcast 9140 4200 VBXcast 9140 4300 Verint 1500e 1600e T Verint 1700e VideoLAN VideoLAN VLC VLS Vorx VON v1 0 4 Operating compression IP Skip bytes Skip bytes Stream TCP PID algorythm protocol at start at end protocol mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg2 RIP 0 0 auto OFF mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 ISMA features not supported mpeg4 UDP 12 0 auto OFF 0 ISMA features not supported mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0 Startstring example SmartSight Only with encoder firmware 3 20 build 444 Usage of S1700e recommend mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0 startstring example SmartSight mpeg2 see 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 below mjpeg For IP protocol multicast unicast UDP or RTP is possible mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 Decoding of AES streams is not supported Table 4 12 Encoder dependant parameter values For some encoders the settings are not defined if there are difficulties to set them please contact the Barco support see section 8 3 Hot line Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 H__1__1__1__1__1__1__11 4 29 4 Operating Control Panel for Quad SDI Video Card C B S Live Still QSDI 1 Channel 1 Encoding Fps Figure 4 8 Xvideo control panel Set contrast of video display Set brightness of video display Set saturation o
75. 4K colors 3 for 32 bpp 16M colors Enter the Depth Resolution 3 2 Configuring the Visual Class A visual class describes the characteristics of a virtual colormap that has been or can be created for use a particular screen The following visual class are supported 1 TrueColor read only visual 2 DirectColor read write visual Enter the Visual Class 1 2 These are your MLS Server settings Core machine s second IP 192 168 1 254 Engines Netmask Address 255 255 255 0 Operational mode Contiguous Number engines 2 Values for engine 1 IP 192 168 1 1 Ether 00 a0 c0 83 76 98 arrangement 2x2 position 0 0 AGX 3281 Bop 16 Visual TrueColor Values for engine 2 IP 192 168 1 2 Ether 00 40 00 83 54 77 arrangement 2x2 position 2 0 AGX 3281 Bpp 16 Visual DirectColor Everything correct yes no yes Finishing the configuration 3 Getting started After specifying the parameters for multiple logical screens the values explained in section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration and section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system must be indicated kkxkxkxkxk xkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkkxk kxk MLS X Server setup done Have fun NOTE enter service mmtserv to start the EOS Distributed X Server kkxkxkxkxk xkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk
76. 4x4 display wall PROCESSOR gr ch 1 gr ch 2 gr ch 3 gr ch 4 OMNIBUS 1 G G O O FOV FOR I jt ft ity jt i JYS ooo LU UJUUUUUUUUU gr ch 5 gr ch 6 gr ch 7 gr ch 8 Figure 6 17 cabling and graphics channels for 1x2 XGA settings Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 WY____1_1__1__ 6 23 Configuration 6 Advanced configuration For the X 11 configuration please refer to section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration a couple consisting of two projection modules is consistently treated as one graphic channel The suitable X 11 configuration that corresponds to the figure above would be Configuring the Monolithic X Server Multiscreen Arrangement Enter the Multi Screen Arrangement Width x Height 2x1 and Channel Reordering 1 redefine reordering 2 take default no reordering Enter selection 1 1 Enter the list of the default channels 1 2 1234567 Enter the list of the new channels 2 1 1 2345678 8 This applies also for the respective settings when configuring a distributed X server or multiple logical screens Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 6 24 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 13 Plai
77. 6 eren 17m eren 1e gr ch 19 gr ch 20 pr ch 16 pr ch 17 pr ch 18 pr ch 19 pr ch 20 Figure 6 15 standard numbering of graphic and projection channels gr ch 1 gr ch 2 gr ch 9 gr ch pr ch 1 pr ch 2 pr ch 3 pr ch O gr ch pr ch D D gr ch 3 gr ch 4 gr ch 12 gr ch 13 gr ch 14 pr ch 6 pr ch 7 pr ch 8 pr ch pr ch 10 gr ch 5 gr ch 6 gr ch 15 01o aP eA Ao a M ly pr ch 11 pr ch 12 pr ch 13 pr ch 14 pr ch 15 gr ch 7 gr ch 8 gr ch 18 gr ch 19 gr ch 20 pr ch 16 pr ch 17 pr ch 18 pr ch 19 pr ch 20 Figure 6 16 reordered numbering of graphic and projection channels Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111 6 13 6 Advanced configuration board 1 2 3 4 5 port 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 graphic channel le ee oe a leo om lee ea a lO e fs fils a iiss a a o a 126 projection channel ly 2 eon levy ate BZ e is ee ee fom ea aa GOs a MIZE lily Mics I 120 Table 6 3 Relation between board port graphic channel and projection channel The entry in the configuration file just concerns the channels that differ from the default configuration Therefore the graphic channels 1 2 18 19 and 20 are not indicated Port 0 of Board 1 still displays the information of the leftmost proj
78. 6 3 UDG RAGING EEEE EO N 6 6 SYSTEM OOl Sraa o A 4 11 Telnet system tools sicadcaceszsscacdn ced onanvasteostvaxientiies 4 11 tight DIN GUNG aissis 4 43 time configuration esriecnenieiiest eer wontunmensagee 3 52 TransForm A COMMCCUIN ici ia tienkudsostrnetehensetnten 3 46 KOUS O i R 3 2 transparent multi Screen eee ececesceseeteeeseeseenes 4 2 T eCOlo Errar 4 4 4 5 4 12 IWS Oa Pall ONNAN 3 31 upgrading systemsoftWware sseseseeneseseseseeeeseo 6 6 USEF ACCOUNTS CONFIGUIATION cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 52 UTIL an O 4 65 DOOL 1OdG Ol esaeen aA ies 4 65 IDI EEEE E AA E E EE 4 65 COSININO a R 4 69 COSKA O 4 67 GE MOCK s E unio 4 71 network FEPOFtiNG cccceeseseessesseseeeeeseeeseseens 4 70 POCI annei evrer rer ter mn ne On Renee eo ene 4 70 FOSTORIA SEVO Dogri E A 4 66 SETVICE MIMS OIV aeaa uel iacesdeirs oltadauess 4 66 9 Index SOW W AUNIIO rasnu R 4 65 VESA tiMINGS ccccceceeeceerecsseeceseeesseeeeseeeees 4 15 4 35 VGA adapter INTCFFACE eee eeccccccsceseeecsscescesecsscesecsceseesseeseenes 7 13 VGN CAN Oost ctesctn te tseon ete each ae A 3 19 VH Sennaa N 3 22 WI SVSTCIN TOON Saaana 4 11 video advanced configuration cceeeeee 6 11 VIGCO ACAD Cl aaran e a 4 18 Video channels sran nrn a TaN 4 18 E E A e E E E E EAT 6 11 visual class deN eer a area tadeteaaeet 4 4 Oli MPAMS FOIA e OA 4 5 visual class configuration eee eeeteeseeteeteeeee 3 56 WSV ENG rosas
79. A for RAID 5 in removable frame without operating system for PROCESSOR AGS 3389 AGS 3390 dust filter for PROCESSOR dust filter for OMNIBUS A12 and EXTENDER dust filter for OmniBus A18 graphics data DVI D lt gt DVI D max UXGA 2 m DVI D lt gt DVI D max UXGA 5 m DVI D lt gt DVI D max SXGA 10 m DVI D lt gt DVI D max SXGA 20 m DVI D gt DVI D optical max UXGA 10 m DVI D gt DVI D optical max UXGA 20 m DVI D gt DVI D optical max UXGA 50 m DVI D gt DVI D optical max UXGA 100 m Dual DVI gt 2xDVI D adapter cable Dual DVI gt 2xCRT adapter cable Dual DVI lt gt Dual DVI cable 0 5 m Dual DVI lt gt Dual DVI cable 1 5 m Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 19 CBL 3205 0 R9842821 R9842822 R9842823 R9842824 CBL 3190 R9842825 R9842826 CBL 3380 2 Software OVT 2686 1 OVT 2686 7 EOS 3070 5 LIC 3291 0 LIC 3291 2 7 Technical appendix DVI D gt MDR26 adapter 0 2 m 3xRCA gt DVI A analog video cable 3 m for DUAL DVI INPUT CARD 3xRCA gt DVI A analog video cable 7 5 m for DuaL DVI INPUT CARD 3xRCA gt DVI A analog video cable 15 m for Duar DVI INPUT CARD 3xRCA gt DVI A analog video cable 30 m for Duar DVI INPUT CARD HD15 gt DVI A adapter for DuaL DVI INPUT CARD 5xBNC gt DVI A adapter cable 0 75 m for Duar DVI INPUT CARD HDMI gt DVI D adapter for Duar DVI I
80. B Set brightness of video display not available ifan scn_dec stream is selected S Set saturation of video display not available ifan scn_dec stream is selected Live Start video display Still Freeze video display SVC X Y Select video card the cards can be renamed The list distinguishes between type SVC 1 and SVC 2 Nevertheless the index Y is numbered continuously Channel 1 Select video channel of the STREAMING VIDEO CARD max 4 channels with scn_dec as com pression algorithm only 1 channel available the channels can be renamed Stream Assign a video stream to the selected channel please refer also to section Configuring Streaming Video Card and Configuring video streams below As soon as a stream has been se lected the name of the stream instead of Stream is shown in the button Codec Shows the configured compression algorithm SVC 1 and codec configuration SVC 2 re spectively Encoding Shows the detected video standard PAL NTSC Fps Select the frame rate FULL HALF default Table 4 9 l Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 4 23 4 Operating Configuring Streaming Video Card For each STREAMING VIDEO CARD once the configuration parameters must be entered into the SVC Settings dialog therefore select SVC Pref gt Board Settings from the File menu please refer to section 4 6 3 The Xvideo client Figure 4 6 SVC Settings dialog of the STREAMING VIDE
81. C 8M2 NiceVision Recorder Pro mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 Only CIF resolution only I and P frames are used No successive Video Object Plane VOP start markers without data used in recorded streams Stream must be multicasted and always available on the network no stream setup signaling required Optelecom NKF mpeg2 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 c15 c20 CS20 The Ethernet interfaces must be set to Forced 100 Mbps Full Duplex when con necting to an NKF Switch Optibase MGW3100 mpeg2 auto OFF Path 1 Cx 1800 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 Pelco PelcoNet NET350 h263 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 l frame distance may not be 0 Pelco PelcoNet NET4001A mpeg2 RTP 4 0 auto OFF 0 No on board RCP support Pelco PelcoNet NET4001A h263 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 No on board RCP support limited frame rate Siemens OTN MVIDIP mpeg2 a 5 z a OFF Siemens OTN MVIDIP mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 Tandberg E5710 mpeg2 Z A OFF Tandberg Mediaplex 20 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 Tandberg 116120 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF Ore Generates multiple program transport streams MPTS The Video PID is used to select the program Tandberg 117116 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 590 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____ 4 28 Encoder manufacturer type Teleste EASI BLUEbox EASI IPET1 EASI IPET3 EASI MORIS Teleste EASI MORIS EASI MPC E1 EASI MPC E2 EASI MPC E
82. Cle x16 extension cards 19 PCI extension cards PCle x1 extension cards 20 PCI extension cards COM2 21 24 PCI extension cards like network cards link interface cards Barco s expansion cards etc de pending on configuration 25 mains connection of power module 26 PS 2 mouse green jack 27 PS 2 keyboard purple jack 28 2xUSB 29 COM1 30 LPT1 31 onboard VGA adapter 32 onboard LAN adapter with the following LED signals left LED lightens green a connection exists blinking green activity right LED off 10 Mbps connection lightens green 100 Mbps connection lightens amber 1000 Mbps connection 33 2xUSB not on AGS 3390 2 34 audio micro not on AGS 3390 2 35 power switch of power module 36 green LED individual power module operating Figure 3 5 rear view of the Processor with standard power supply left detail with redundant power supply right and details of the rear connection plate of the Processor AGS 3390 2 bottom Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 HH ___ ____1__ 3 5 3 Getting started On the left hand side is the mains connection 25 At the case of a Processor with redundant power supplies there is for both of the two power modules a mains connection 25 and additionally a power switch 35 and an LED 36 that indicates operation of the power module when lightened In the middle of the power modules there is the air supply 14 The remote power on of
83. D power on 9 floppy disk drive optional 10 hard disk drive RAID 1 subsystem RAID 5 subsystem solid state drive 11 DVD ROM drive 12 reserved 13 power button Figure 3 1 front view of the Processor Next to the air supply openings 1 there is the handle of the filter mounting 2 In the center behind the front flap there are from top to bottom the buzzer reset button for power module failure 5 the lock keyboard switch 4 followed by the restart button 3 and finally the power button 13 Next to these buttons to the right side there are three LEDs In the top position there is a red LED indicating power module failure 6 of a redundant power module The yellow LED indicates hard disk access 7 and the green LED indicates power on Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Y ___ __1 __1__1__1__1__1__1_1 3 2 3 Getting started 8 On the right hand side there is optionally the floppy disk drive 9 followed by the DVD ROM drive 11 and below it the hard disk drive 10 There are hard disks with parallel ATA PATA and serial ATA SATA available They come as standard hard disks RAID 1 hard disk system RAID 5 hard disk system or solid state drive PATA hard disks may be used in PROCESSOR models AGS 3328 AGS 3389 or AGS 3390 SATA hard disks may only be used in Processor models AGs 3389 and AGS 3390 The figure above front view of the Processor includes t
84. DM Protocol indirect 199 123 222 17 Font Server tcp 199 123 222 17 7100 Everything correct yes no yes y Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 57 3 Getting started Channel reordering For some installations it is useful to change the order of the projection channels This can be assigned in the Channel Reordering section If you want to reorder the projection channels enter y By entering n this section will be skipped X Server s Channel Reordering This is the reordering configuration part of the X Server It offers the possibility to define the reordering channels section The channels section defines the assignment of graphic channels to projection channels Please read the section X Server Configuration in the User s Manual Eos X Terminal Do you want to proceed yes no no y The correlation between graphic channels and projection channels is explained in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A channels Please have a look there to have a further explanation Channel Reordering Assign to a default graphic channel a new position in the Display Wall Channel Reordering 1 redefine reordering 2 take default no reordering Enter selection 1 1 Enter the list of the default channels 1 2 1234567 8 Enter the list of the new channels 2 1 13572468 These are the Reordering Settings for the Monolithic X Se
85. DUAL RGB Input Card have two adapters with one port each The TRANSForM A system automatically creates video channels according to the available input adapters by simply assigning one channel per adapter in the order in which the input cards are inserted into the PCI slots of TRANSFORM A ae In a distributed system in addition the order of the rendering machines is considered when creating the numbers of the video channels In a monolithic system of an OmniBus configuration where input cards are located in multiple OmniBus devices the video display is restricted to the display area of the respective OmniBus where the input card is plugged in In a distributed system video adapters of multiple rendering machines one from each rendering machine can be integrated to a logical video channel A logical video channel can be displayed on the display area of all appendant rendering machines h 11 Ghann Channel 1 Figure 4 2 video input cards in different rendering machines left operated separately right as one logical channel The configration of logical video channels is done by means of the configuration script EOSconfig please refer to section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system Additional background information about the configuration of logical video channels can be found in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A Barco TransForm
86. E oeren a es 6 11 serial interface siina n 4 53 service Remote Control client 0 4 53 4 55 service mmtserv Utility cece ete eeeeeeee 4 66 Shared color cell vec eee ccsecesssecesseeeeees 4 3 4 8 SHOU SYVSTCI 100 S nna 4 11 Showwallinfo utility ec ecseceseeteeseeeseenes 4 65 simultaneous operation c ce ccesseeeeseeseeeseeees 4 12 Stau CCOO aii r N 4 4 SICG V enee hae cate eat amas Sonic ctete cake 4 4 stream CONFIQUIATION ccecceceeeeeeseeteeseeeeeee 4 25 Streaming Video Card DOGG iSO UMNO S neern NA 4 24 CON TEO DANE I acsscsacvassaysdesaaseasssdazeesshaonseasteaneads 4 23 Mtera Ea a nates 7 14 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLY 9 4 mod le VIdEO oe eee ceeeeceesecesseecesneee 4 6 4 12 ONGC EEATT E EEEE EA 3 23 3 37 3 39 PODERES oiiaii eed 4 14 Streaming Video Card SVC 1 technical dataren o nE RE TAR 7 4 Streaming Video Card SVC 2 technical Gale sasn 7 5 SUD NEL ein 3 30 EELE L AEE E EA E T E T 3 33 COnfNgUrI O Mesan aaa 3 61 EE DAE EA tae EEE A ET 3 30 S WIE CHINNG Oli cienendianidan ae 3 48 SWIC CHING OT a se r A 3 46 SVINC ONG COMN narrita 3 26 3 28 syntax Of resource FICS cece ccecssceeetseeseeees 4 43 SVS CCUM DCC asninn rn E 4 10 SYSTEM configuration cece eteeseeteeseeeeeeeeeeneens 3 49 system configuration Script eee eee ceeeseeeeeeeeees 6 8 system software MST ANN a E E EE E E E
87. File above SEa CoE MMT On r io MPIO esee or S see option mpgPresetFile above string ee Muito minnkey mp elo cee e Oi see option mpgBoardFile above Table 4 35 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt 4 51 4 Operating 4 7 Remote Control for OverView display walls An OverView display wall can be controlled by TRANSForm A Commands can be sent to switch the lamps and ana log video controllers on and off or the status of the illumination units can be scanned The REMOTE CONTROL can also be used for monitoring TRANSForM A Its operating status can be scanned and if nec essary it can be halted or rebooted Alternatively the additional wall management software Osiris offers as well the functionality of a remote control for the Osiris users manual see section 7 3 Order codes Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1_1_W1_1__ 4 5 4 Operating 4 7 1 The Remote Control daemon The REMOTE CONTROL is implemented in a client server architecture The REmoTE CONTROL daemon is the central authority server that connects the REmoTE ConTROL Clients with the serial interface Four different REMoTE CONTROL clients are available e Monitor This service sets up a software based monitoring function TRANSForM A is rebooted automatically after ab sence of specific monitor telegrams e Service This service includes the possib
88. GE OM aikee a a a a 3 49 22 Mi s OMI WGA ENON E AEE EE E A T VA ar taste T I AEEA A ane cet 3 53 34 3 Configuring adistributed Systemsa Ea E ae ENE TO 3 61 3 4 4 Configuring a distributed system with multiple logical screens sonsnnnnnnnnnnnnnsosesnesesnsnesesessesesees 3 65 AOPE en r r ENEE E ONTO T eee 4 1 A MUNESCECO MCAD ADIN a T Maaeee idee ed ance een ees 4 2 4 2 Color manageme Mtei eeso aeina a e AEE EIEEE EEEE ENIRE EE OaE 4 3 42l ASIC WGN SUA GING gesa E N N 4 3 ADAE OEE 9s 10 1 E A E EE E E E EAE E EA EE AAN S A E T 4 5 AKD N Ea E A hnecucen aannacenanecasensehcaa sea tecesneeoanae nates 4 7 MAENEO EN ON S ae a a r E O 4 8 AS NVINGO WEN AN AGC T siase a a aN 4 9 4 6 Displaying video and RGB SignalS nsnseonnnnsesesnnsesoonesesnsnesesnssesessesesesnesesssnesesssnesisssnesesrsnsnesensssesesnssesesess 4 12 AG WNC MP UL Cal NN N 4 14 462 The video channel siicassucsdusssusiatsancaiteseawinestash a netlesyetaadvanaanslid eassantaewlceadaseiaben 4 18 AGB IVE AV IGSO anraso aa a a a a aa 4 19 4 64 DISMlaVING VIGGO and RGB SIGMANS nres eirian nA EEE ER 4 22 Aa PE ODON E O oS oy oN a eS NT 4 37 WOO WNC es COUN CO ls EE EAT EEE EE EE EE E E PE EN EE EE A 4 43 4 7 Remote Control for OverView display walls oo ccc ccccsscsscesecsscsscesscsscesecscesecsscesceseesscsscesecscessesseeseenes 4 52 AAA MING REMMI OLE Cont ol daem Misna Saeieasbndead tac asa aeaneceniaes 4 53 4 7 2 The Remote Control clients command line
89. GND 53 54 GND 55 56 57 GND 58 59 60 GND Onboard VGA adapter 1 red 2 green 3 blue 4 5 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 0 Data1 0 Data1 0 Clock 0 Clock 0 Hot Plug detect 0 LED PGA Scaler detect 1 LED PGA 1 Hot Plug detect 1 Clock 1 Clock 1 Data1 1 Data1 D D On Oo n O red GND f lt blue GND 6 7 green GND 8 9 10 sync GND 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 16 15 0 Data0 0 Data0 0 Data2 0 Data2 Int Scaler 1 Data2 1 Data2 1 Data0 1 Data0 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 Technical appendix 15 GND 14 13 12 GND 11 0 5V Power 10 O DDC clock 9 0 DDC data 8 GND 7 1 DDC data 6 1 DDC clock 5 1 5V Power 4 GND 3 2 1 GND Figure 7 4 Dual DVI connector digital out 11 12 13 HSYNC 14 VSYNC 15 Figure 7 5 7 13 7 Technical appendix Streaming Video Card TD TD RD RD 5 6 7 8 Aa WN Figure 7 6 RJ 45 connector Streaming video card Quad SDI Video Card or Quad Analog Video Card 1 Signal 2 Shield Figure 7 7 BNC connector QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD Of QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD Dual DVI Input Card C5 C2 C4 C1 C3 8 mes 24 nEaN 16 1 ARE 17 o c2 Analog Green c5 Analog Gro
90. High reliability redundancy on system level and for critical components The TRANSForm A system provides a flexible and scalable architecture which is suitable to support all sizes of display walls For large display walls and high amounts of inserted sources one TRANSFoRM A Processor is used that connects to up to five TRANSFoRM A OMNIBus devices Smaller systems with up to 24 projection cubes can be set up with a TRANSFoRM A Processor that may use an additional TRANSFoRM A EXTENDER depending on the amount of video and RGB sources For more complex configurations a distributed system can be used consisting of a central Proc ESSOR and multiple rendering engines to control a display wall of any size and number of input sources Independent of the usage of a monolithic system or a distributed system both the user and the application soft ware see one single display Installation operation and service do not differ from that of a standard X terminal TRANSFORM A offers the possibility to operate it in normal boot mode or in eXtended safety boot mode Normal boot mode offers full write access to the hard disk and enables the operation of the wall management software Osiris eXtended safety boot mode offers in addition to normal boot mode a backup partition for improved sys tem safety With eXtended safety boot mode the system files are stored safely and faultless startup is guaran teed even after unpredictable events e g power failure TRANSF
91. IBUS 4 OmNIBus 5 OmNIBus 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 9 G 0 0 o 0j 0 Jo 0j Jo o faf fu u In fi 0O O O O 00000000 1 I 1 II o i0 o 0 0 joj 0 jo o fajfa o 1 1 O aS d we an an an an an an an Jn Jn a a A I a a a M A A a 1 2 30 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 40 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 G G G G G G G G G G G G G GQ G GG G bhad OmNIBus 1 OMNIBUS 2 OMNIBUS 3 PCI PCI PCI RENDERING RENDERING RENDERING TCP IP PROCESSOR Figure 3 51 large distributed system configuration Three rendering machines are used each consisting out of two OmniBus devices one for graphic cards and one for OMNISCALER and input cards and one rendering processor that connects to the subnet On the wall there are three logical display areas each belongs to one rendering machine There are differ
92. IF streams or 2 4 ACIF streams MxPEG up to 4 CIF streams or 2 1280x576 streams Visiowave 1 3 D1 streams or up to 4 CIF streams depends on resolution TRANSFORM SCN 1 stream MPEG 2 Bosch Coretec Cornet Exterity Fast Video Security HaiVision iMPath Lanaccess Mavix NKF NiceVision Optelecom Opti base Path1 PelcoNET Siemens OTN Tandberg Teleste Telin dus VBrick VideoLAN Vorx Cieffe Cornet DVTeL Hi Tron IndigoVision Lanaccess Mavix NiceVision Siemens OTN Teleste VBrick Verint VideoLAN Vorx MPEG 4 part 2 MPEG 4 h263 Bosch PelcoNET MJPEG AXIS JVC Lenel VideoLAN MXPEG Mobotix 2D Wavelet GE Security Visiowave TRANSFORM SCN Barco UDP RTP variable header length lost packet detection non video packet detection IGMP v2 and v3 multicast subscription internal data path YUV 4 2 2 16 bit wide PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 42 3 3 V 0 3 V 5V 22A 3 3V 3 4A 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm 480 g 1 x 64 bit 3 3 V 5 V PCI edge connector 2 x RJ45 connector 8 pin for redundant connection Table 7 7 7 4 Streaming Video Card SVC 2 scaler digital network carrier compression algorithm video formats bitrate supported encoders network transmission protocol connection protocols colors bus power supply power consumption operating conditions dimensions Weight connectors Quad Analog Vi
93. L hot keys and the configuration of the projection channels are defined in the configuration file of TRANSFORM A etc MMTconfig MMTConfigSections The file MMTConfigSections consists of up to five sections geometry video channels rctrl and osiris geometry This section starts with the keyword geometry and defines the geometry of the rendering machines in a dis tributed system and the color depth and visual class of the rendering machines with multiple logical screens This geometry section must not be changed manually but it is configured by means of the X 11 configuration script EOSconfig please refer to sections 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system and 3 4 4 Configuring a distributed system with multiple logical screens General information about multiple logical screens can be found in section 4 1 Multi screen capability With multiple logical screens an individual color depth and visual class can be assigned to each screen Multiple logical screens can be used in two different modes Separate screens or Contiguous screens These modes differ only in the behavior of the cursor and in the demands of the arrangement of projection cubes The contiguous screens mode is used if multiple screens shall be displayed on one display wall The screens must completely fill the rectangular array of the display wall The cursor can be moved continuously over all screens on the whole display wall In the geometry section the keyword ContiguousScreens m
94. Left handed mouse Right handed mouse System beep Root loud and long loud normal off Background BARCO logo Standard black Standard white Standard gray Standard navy blue Grid 640x480 Grid 1600x1200 Grid 640x480 bold Grid 1600x1200 bold X Server default mode pseudo 8 Bit color mode true 16 Bit color mode direct 16 Bit color mode true 32 Bit color mode direct 32 Bit color mode 4 Operating Set speed of mouse to fast Set speed of mouse to normal Set speed of mouse to slow Configure mouse for left handed operation Configure mouse for right handed operation Set system beep to loud and long Set system beep to loud Set system beep to normal Switch off system beep Select Barco logo as background for root window Select black as background for root window Select white as background for root window Select gray as background for root window Select navy blue as background for root window Selection of various adjustment grids maintenance Restart X server in default color mode Restart X server in PseudoColor mode 8bpp Restart X server in TrueColor mode 16 bpp Restart X server in DirectColor mode 16 bpp Restart X server in TrueColor mode 32 bpp Restart X server in DirectColor mode 32 bpp Alternatively the X server can by restarted by means of the restart X server utility please refer to section 4 8 4 Restart X server utility service mmtserv Q G Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2
95. NG VIDEO CARD SVC 2 QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL RGB INPUT CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD Ethernet card 10 100 1000 Mbps PCI Ethernet card 10 100 1000 Mbps PCI server Ethernet card 10 100 1000 Mbps PCle x1 Ethernet card 10 100 1000 Mbps PCle x1 server Multiport 1 0 card Logitech USB optical mouse with PS 2 adapter 2 5m cable USB Keyboard English USB PC keyboard USB mouse extension with 20 m RJ 45 extension cable CBL 3380 5 USB PC keyboard USB mouse extension with 50 m RJ 45 extension cable CBL 3380 6 Gigabit Ethernet Switch 8 ports memory 256MB DDR RAM DIMM for AGs 3328 memory 512MB DDR RAM DIMM for AGs 3328 memory 512MB DDR2 RAM DIMM for AGs 3389 memory 1GB DDR2 RAM DIMM for AGS 3389 memory 1GB DDR2 FB DIMM for aGs 3390 2 Spare power module for PROCESSOR AGS 3389 1 3 AGS 3328 3 AGS 3390 2 Or EXTENDER EOS 3193 1 Spare power module 600 W for OMNIBUS A12 AGS 3359 Spare power module 600 W for OmniBus A18 AGS 3335 1 Spare fan module for OmniBus A18 AGS 3335 spare hard disk drive PATA in removable frame without operating system for PROCESSOR AGS 3328 spare hard disk drive PATA for RAID 1 in removable frame without operating system for PROCESSOR AGS 3328 OF AGS 3389 AGS 3390 spare hard disk drive SATA in removable frame without operating system for PROCESSOR AGS 3389 AGS 3390 Spare hard disk drive SATA for RAID 1 in removable frame without operating system for PROCESSOR AGS 3389 AGS 3390 Spare hard disk drive SAT
96. NPUT CARD Remote power on off cable CD ROM Medium TRANSForm A system disk CD ROM medium TRANSForM A documentation amp supplement for X Terminal TRANSFORM A base license Processor configuration TRANSFORM A base license OmniBus configuration and distributed X server configuration driver license per graphic channel of UGX GRAPHIC CARD Table 7 16 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 20 8 Troubleshooting 8 Troubleshooting Check this chapter for help if your TRANSForm A does not boot properly and for information how to contact the technical support of Barco Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 1 8 1 TransForm A not booting 8 Troubleshooting When TRANSForm A is not booting properly it is important to state at which point of the boot process a fault oc curs The display while booting is as follows so you can see where the process is stopped On the first display board 1 port 0 see section 3 2 5 Graphic cards respectively on the central unit s VGA moni tor M3 PCI 128b DDCinfo Native DFC resolution is 1024x768Q068Hz ARGUS AGX 3000 VGA BIOS 3000 04 06 08 02 COPYRIGHT 2002 BARCO Control Rooms PCX 3000 0 gt MIPS RAM Base F000000 gt Number of VGAs 0 PCX 3000 1 gt MIPS RAM Base SE600000 gt Number of VGAs 6 PGA inside Total amount of VGA
97. NSFoRM A and insert the system CD TRANSForM A will boot from CD The Welcome Screen displays a selection of installation options Select the type for your installation and enter the required keyword e TRANSFORM A in eXtended safety boot mode press the lt Enter gt key e TRANSFORM A in normal boot mode type eosn and press the lt Enter gt key e Upgrade TRANSFORM A please see section 6 1 3 Upgrading system software To instal press the lt ENTER gt key To install type eosn lt ENTER gt To upgrade the E system type upgrade lt ENTER gt boot Figure 6 1 After selecting the type of your installation you are asked if you really want to delete the partitions and install the system software If you want to skip the installation you can press lt alt gt lt ctr1l gt lt delete gt simultane ously If you want to install you must confirm with y lt cr gt and the TRANsForm A operating system is getting installed Your HARDDISK will be formatted NOW ALL of the partitions on your hard drive s will be erased This means that all of the data on your system will be destroyed If you want to continue type y and press ENTER If you do not want to loge all your partitions press CTRL ALT DELETE to reboot don t forget to REMOVE the bootable EOS cD ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Figure 6 2 When the system software is installed just the keyboard and the IP address of the primary network card must be
98. O CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 left and STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 2 right Network Configuration IP Address IP address of the STREAMING VIDEO CARD Each STREAMING VIDEO CARD needs its own fixed IP address Netmask Netmask of the STREAMING VIDEO CARD must be the same value for all cards Default Gateway Gateway must be the same value for all cards Even if the network does not require an indication of the Gateway a value must be filled in Decoder Configuration Algorithm Only for SVC 7 All video streams processed by one STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 must have the same compression algorithm Currently the compression algorithms h263 mjpeg mpeg2 mpeg4_sp mxpeg scn_dec visiowave vnc are supported Table 4 10 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 24 4 Operating Configuring video streams The parameters of a video stream must be defined in the SVC Stream Params Editor before the STREAMING VIDEO CarD can display it Once defined it is available for every STREAMING VIDEO CARD in the system To open the SVC Stream Params Editor select SVC Pref gt Stream Settings from the File menu please refer to section 4 6 3 The Xvideo client Pressing the Add button adds a new stream with the entered name into the Streams list The parameters that are displayed at that time are saved together with it If there exists already an entry with the same name
99. ORM A is the perfect solution for the integration of video and RGB sources into desktop graphic data into digitally controlled display walls However graphics only systems support also analog display connection Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111 2 2 Summary OmniBus configuration monolithic system A TRANSFORM A system that integrates OmniBus devices is referred to as OmniBus configuration further on in this document In a monolithic system the OmniBus configuration consists of a Processor that connects to up to four or five OMNIBUS A12 or OMNIBUS A18 devices The Processor is the host computer of the OmniBus devices It is run ning the operating system and applications and controls the OmniBus devices where the graphical output is gen erated and integrated with the video and RGB insertion data Such a monolithic system allows controlling more than 100 sources or up to 80 projection modules with the abil ity to display video and RGB windows anywhere on the wall Medium sized systems can be set up with a Processor and one single OMNIBUS OMNIBUS PROCESSOR Ethernet TCP IP X Window Figure 2 1 15 channel monolithic TRANSForM A in OmniBus configuration Processor configuration monolithic system Small systems with one up to 24 projection cubes can be set up with a single Processor Depending on the am
100. OmniBus devices may contain graphics cards OMNISCALERS and input cards may be used in both OmniBus devices In a Processor configuration one rendering machine consists just in one rendering PROCESSOR Each rendering Processor is connected to the central device by means of the TRANSForM A sub net With the distributed system each rendering machine operates a rectangular array of projection modules within a display wall The actual subdivision into arrays depends on the requirements of each display wall e g displaying video The following figure shows an example for a 10x5 arrangement Figure 3 37 Example for the assignment of rendering machines to projection modules can be found in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A Additional information about the assignment of rendering machines to projection modules The rendering machines are connected to the central Processor within a separate sub net see also section 3 2 13 Network Therefore a second network adapter has to be used in the central Processor e g the second onboard LAN adapter of the Processor AGS 3390 2 or for other Processor types an additional network card For the LAN connection always the network interface ethO is used and for the sub net connection always eth1 is used In doubt the network reporting utility can be used to
101. R is numbered according to the graphic card it is connected to The QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARDS STREAMING VIDEO CARDS QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD and DUAL RGB INPUT CARDS are numbered commonly with ascending PCI slots The OmniBus devices themselves are taken into account in ascending order of their respective PCI slots in the Processor or in a distrib uted system in the order of the rendering machines PROCESSOR Link Link Link Inter Inter Inter face face face 1 2 3 l PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 OmniBus 1 Graph Graph Graph Graph Graph Graph Graph Graph Graph Graph Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ne ht e CPU link PCI 1 Pcl2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 PCI7 PCI8 PCI9 PCI10 PCI11 PCI12 board slot iL OmniBus 2 OmNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI Input OMNI Input OMNI Input Omni Input SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER Card 1 SCALER Card 2 SCALER Card 3 SCALER Card 4 ee oe 7 Video 8 Video 9 10 11 12 TTT lida Wirinia CPU link PCI 1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 PCI7 fl PCI9 pei PCI 11 peii board slot OmniBus 3 OmNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI OMNI Input Input Input Input Input Input SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER SCALER Card 5 Card 6 Card 7 Card 8 Card 9 Card10 20 Video Video Video Video Video Video 13 14 15 16 17
102. REmoTE ContRoL client retri can be started as follows retrl lt option gt After rctrl is started e g choose from menu following left click on root window a control panel shows up offering a graphical user interface for controlling the OverView cubes and the various HERmES boxes Display REMOTE CONTROL 1 Single cubes can be specified by scrolling with the arrow buttons All Send respective command to all connected cubes On Switch on specified cube Off Switch off specified cube State Send a request to the specified cube The reply is displayed in the status display below Clear Clear the status display above File Exit Exit the rctr1 client Figure 4 14 The REMOTE CONTROL daemon detects automatically which type of OverView display wall is connected to TRANSForM A Initially the statuses of the connected cubes are displayed also automatically in the status display Be careful not to switch off the cube that currently displays the control panel because it would be difficult to switch it on again by REMoTE CoNnTROL Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______LLL 4 60 Switch 1 All In 1 for Out 1 In 2 for Out 1 4 Operating moopeoo eer YLA HY KE E I NTROL A single unit can be specified by scrolling with the arrow buttons Send respective command to all connected unit Switch first output to first input Switch first output to second i
103. S 6 Scan system for AGX 3000 Dev BP Bus Slot O 1 3 O init 1 2 3 1 init 2 1 8 O init 3 1 8 i init 4 1 11 O init D L at 1 init The ordinary self test report of a PC is displayed BAs 1C000008 S0000B401 S48640000 done PGA BAs 20000008 S0000B401 S48644000 done BAs 2C000008 S0000B401 S48720000 done BAs 30000008 S0000B401 48724000 done BAs 38000008 S0000B401 48C40000 done BAs 3C000008 S0000B401 48C44000 done The other displays show their respective bus and slot no e g M3 PCI 128b ARGUS AGX 3000 VGA BIOS 3000 04 06 08 02 Dev 1 BP 1 PCI Bus 3 Slot 1 COPYRIGHT 2002 BARCO Control Rooms 20000008 0000B401 48644000 DDCinfo Native DFP resolution is 1024x768 68Hz fault boot process is aborted while Dey BP Sus sor 1 8 fede Ase 2iConCOOE 50000B401 48640000 done PGA 1 i 8 dade Base 420000006 Y 0000B401 48644000 done etc is displayed boot process is aborted CMOS checksum error appears on the display boot process is aborted Thais PC has no hard disk or hard disk is unreadable SYSTEM HALTED appears on the display boot process is aborted Unable to read system configuration Press lt Pl gt eo resume Of lt FP2 gt TOP Setup appears on the display cause steps There is probably a problem with the graphic cards Ask an authorized person to make sure that all graphic cards are inserted correctly If the fault remains
104. USB plugs at the back of the Processor Figure 3 19 USB Keyboard extension The RJ 45 connection cable is not meant to connect REX and LEX via a network The RJ 45 connectors of LEX and REX must be connected directly with each other Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 Getting started 3 2 5 Graphic cards The DDC capable UGX and AGX Grapuic Caros provide the facility for connecting CRT monitors or projectors analog mode or for connecting Barco projection modules digital mode to TRANSForm A By means of a rotary switch on the board they can easily be switched between analog and digital mode For TRANSForRM A systems with digital output and video or RGB insertions the output of the graphic cards is led over to OMNISCALERS and then connected to the display device Please refer to section 3 2 6 OmniScaler Connectors The UGX GRAPHIC CARD provides two Dual DVI connectors to connect four display devices For digital output resolu tions up to 1920x1200 can be processed LED port 0 1 port 0 1 out port 2 3 out LED port 2 3 Figure 3 20 Ports of UGX GRAPHIC CARD DDC capable display devices must be connected to the graphic cards before TransForm A is switched on If they are connected afterwards TransForm A will not be able to detect them Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the graphic cards please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barc
105. User s manual Transform A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 current version Title TRANSFORM A X Terminal User s Manual ID no DOC 3265 2 Revision 11 Date August 2008 main issue update chapter 1 add chapter 2 add chapter 3 add chapter 4 add chapter 5 chapter 6 add chapter 7 add chapter 8 chapter 9 new The corresponding chapters are new or completely revised COTT Passages of the corresponding chapter were corrected see modification bars add Passages of the corresponding chapter were added see modification bars This manual refers to following hardware and software configurations of TRansForm A X Terminal Release X Server R43 Document history Modifications which result in a new version are indicated by a vertical bar Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 2 1 ji Trademarks Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective holders All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples and are not to be understood as advertising for the products or their manufacturers Copyright 1997 2008 by Barco Die Weitergabe sowie die Vervielf ltigung aller Unterlagen die von uns berlassen werden deren Verwertung und Mitteilung ihres Inhaltes an Dritte ist nicht gestattet soweit dies nicht ausdr cklich zugestanden ist Urheberrechte insbesondere auch s
106. VERVIEW MP ATLAS67C4 PSI HERMES V2A HERMES D2D HERMES VXA HERMES DXD Table 4 36 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1____1__ 4 53 4 Operating 4 7 2 The Remote Control clients command line based In accordance with the offered services of the REMOTE CONTROL daemon there are clients which use these services Different clients can use the same service simultaneously rctrimon The monitor client rctrlmon monitors the connection between client on host computer and daemon on TRANSFORM A For this purpose the client sends periodically keep alive telegrams for the daemon The daemon boots TRANSForM A after absence of the telegrams The rctrlmon client can be started as follows rctrlmon lt option gt Following options are available option H P z a argument default meaning lt hostname gt ewe lk Inmesic Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started POr Poro Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed lt KeepAliveIntervall gt 5 sec Specifies the period between two keep alive telegrams lt KeepAliveRetries gt IMG Specifies the maximum number of missing telegrams after which the daemon reboots TRANSFORM A Table 4 37 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1__1__1__1__1__1__ 4 54 4 Operating rctriservice The servi
107. achines From Re lease 3 48 of the X server on PXE can be used to boot the rendering machines In this case Wake On LAN must be activated to enable the rendering machines to boot and reboot reliable If still the Etherboot mechanism is used Wake On LAN can also be activated but there is no need to do so Please refer to section 3 2 13 Network for a short explanation of Etherboot and PXE boot mechanism and in case you activate WOL check also for the appropriate BIOS settings see section 6 1 11 BIOS settings for rendering machines Engine s boot mode Configuration The Engines can be switched on by the Core Machine by using the WOL Wake On LAN facility NB When using WOL you have to enable WOL also in the motherboard BIOS Do you want to use WOL yes no no yes The script lists your settings Examine the values and confirm them by entering y or enter n for repeating the previous installation steps These are your Distributed X Server settings Subnet IP 192 168 149 254 Subnet Netmask 255 255 255 0 NIC card 100 Mbit Number Engines 2 Values for Engine 1 IP 192 168 149 1 Ether 00 60 08 a6 a9 58 arrangement 4x2 position 0 0 Values for Engine 2 IP 192 168 149 2 Ether 00 60 08 a6 a9 73 arrangement 4x2 position 4 0 WakeOnLAN Yes Everything correct yes no yes y Channel reordering For some installations it is useful to change the order of the projection channels This can b
108. activates automatic reconfiguration Invokes reconfiguration Table 4 49 Refer to section 4 6 5 The options for a description of the geometry type in X 11 please Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 62 Resources of the rctrl class 4 Operating Refer to section 4 6 6 The resource files please for a description of the resources concept of X 11 including the respective path names The name of the resource file itself must be RCtr1 instead A template for such a re source file is opt MMT2686 bin linux RCtrl The following table lists all resources of the rctr1 Class option title geometry host Pore LEONLGC avcEnableConfig avcReconfig argument default meaning SE SALAS REMOTE CONTROL Determines the window title of the rctr1 control panel SVE le ah igye T ZOO LOW see option geometry above lt hostname gt Orca I Invest Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started Port Moa 7S Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed Or l 0 Iconifies value 1 or resizes value 0 the rctr1 control panel Ota O see option e above O 0 see option r above Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Table 4 50 4 Operating 4 7 4 Hot keys The commands for controlling the illumination units of an OverView display wall can be
109. agers which allow consistent management over several screens Multi screen In multi screen mode TRANSForm A offers in the sense of X 11 only a single root window which extends over the whole display wall with an unlimited number of projection modules Every window manager allows to posi tion the windows of any client somewhere on the display wall to displace them to another projection module or even to expand them over several or all projection modules simultaneously Multiple logical screens With the multiple logical screens mode TransForm A combines in a way the multi head mode and the multi screen mode It allows one X server to display multiple screens each on an individual rectangular array of mxn graphic channels Each screen can be configured with its own color depth and visual class Multiple logical screens can only be used with a distributed system Each rendering machine displays one screen The configuration of multiple logical screens is explained in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A geometry Note that multiple logical screens can not be used simultaneously together with the X MultiCursor extension XMC see section 4 4 X Server extensions Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 42 4 Operating 4 2 Color management 4 2 1 Basic understanding The translation between RGB values specified in applications and the color displayed on scree
110. al DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 3 12 3 Getting started 3 1 4 Extender In a typical Processor configuration the PCI slots of the Processor are used for inserting all expansion cards The EXTENDER extends the Processor by adding 13 PCI slots Thus a bigger number of projection modules or more input sources can be connected in a Processor configuration The EXTENDER is equipped with a redundant hot plug power supply Small systems which exceed the number of available slots in the Processor can either be configured as an Omni Bus configuration or as a Processor configuration with an EXTENDER if the input requirements are moderate and the slots of an EXTENDER sufficient The front The EXTENDER looks like this or similar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ventilation flap with air supply 2 lock of ventilation flap 3 On Off switch 4 green LED power on on power is switched on off power is switched off 5 buzzer reset button power module failed 6 red LED power module failed on One power module has failed or power connection to a module is interrupted off device is switched on power modules OK power output OK or device is off no power applies 7 front flap 8 lock of front flap Figure 3 13 Front view of the EXTENDER On the front of the Extenoer behind the front flap 7 on the lowest position there is the On Off switch 3 On the top position is a buzzer reset button 5 to confirm the failure of a redundan
111. al Revision 11 August 2008 ______ 6 26 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 14 System watchdog auto restart The X server is delivered with two programs that are used to keep a watch on the connection between a host and the Processor and to reset the Processor if necessary e argusreset is a client running on the host and monitors the connection between host and Processor e argusd is a server running on the Processor Client and server communicate via a socket connection The client sends cyclical in the configurable time interval a control packet to the server Independent from that the server increases the value of a counter after a time interval Each time the server receives a packet the counter is set to zero again If no packets reach the server the counter exceeds a limit In this case it is assumed that the connection is broken and the server initiates a reset argusreset To use the client first copy the file arcgusreset from the path usr bin of the Processor to the client com puter Then the client can be started with the following command line options argusreset c p port t time n timeout v y lt ip address gt Option meaning c If the parameter c is set the values time and timeout are transferred to the server to activate controlling p port specifies the port Default 13456 t time This parameter sets the time passing before the client sends the next packet Values are valid between 1 an
112. allows you to specify the query type entering n causes X 11 to start without xdm e query will connect you directly to the specified XDM e indirect will cause a chooser box to be opened where you can select your XDM e broadcast will connect you to the XDM that replies first to your request Configuring X Display Manager XDM The local X Display Manager can be used to login on the Eos X Terminal Do you want start the X Server with XDMCP yes no yes y Set the XDMCP Query Types 1 query direct 2 indirect 3 broadcast Enter query type 2 2 Enter the ip address of your XDM 150 158 181 149 199 123 222 17 Font server Please specify if you want to use a font server If necessary clarify the IP address as well as the respective port number with your network administrator Configuring the Font Server If you want a Font Server which supplies fonts for the X Server please answer the following question with either y or n Do you want to use a Font Server yes no yes y Enter the ip address of your Font Server 150 158 181 149 199 123 222 17 Enter the Font Server s port number 7100 7100 The script lists your settings Examine the values and confirm them by entering y or enter n for repeating the previous configuration steps These are your X Server General Settings Bits Per Pixel 8 and 16 Visual Class default visual PseudoColor 2nd visual TrueColor X Server s RGB Values 40 40 200 X
113. an status of OverView cube restime Reset operating hours to zero version Get version number exit Exits the client Table 4 44 Table 4 45 If the client is operated interactively it prompts rct rl1dlp gt gt The commands can be shortened by unambiguous short cuts Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 rctriswitch 4 Operating The client rct rlswitch can be operated interactively or command by command The client rctrlswitch can be started as follows rcetrlswitch lt option gt Following options are available option argument meaning h lt hostname gt default Tece Enoc Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started p POr P O79 Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed e lt exec command gt Specifies desired command Table 4 46 The retrliswitch client accepts following commands command enable disable reconfig aux lt ctrl number all gt lt on off gt Switch lt ctrl number all gt lt input output gt meaning activating auto config mode deactivating auto config mode invoking reconfiguration switching between different inputs assigning input to output channels Hermes DXD and HER version lt ctrl number all gt help exit mes VXA only input and output can either be indicated in the form e g 1 2 or 2 2 or a shortcut can be used thru Of In1 to Out
114. ansForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 12 1 Introduction 1 2 Styles and symbols The typographic styles and the symbols used in this document have the following meaning Bold Labels menus and buttons are printed in Bold font Condensed Links to both other chapters of this manual and to sites in the Internet are printed condensed In the on line version of this manual all hyperlinks appear teal CO Names of files and parts from programs are printed in the Courier font Courier bold Inputs you are supposed to do from the keyboard are printed in Courier bold font F K CWO Within a piece of programming code this arrow marks a line that must be made up in two lines though meant to be one line If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk of damage to the equipment If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk of electrical shock and danger to personal health If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk of damage to parts which are sensitive towared electrostatic charge If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk to get harmed by sharp objects If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk that parts may explode If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk that hot parts impact persons or objects T
115. at 3 3 power Tall UNC sconseds idea MisdenssnscrcunivassodackicMests 2 2 6 2 preset file HS meniernr a a On 4 19 presets Dual DVI Input Cam ce ecceceeceeeteeeeeenee 7 7 Dual RGB INPUt CITA opsiin 7 7 privatecolor cell seseina 4 3 PIOCCS SOT au E pie gaceatatactestanecsee mute aaentes 2 2 EXPANSION Slots oo ees ceeesecssceseesecssceseessceseeseenes 3 6 technical data ccc ccccsecssccsecsecsseeseesseeseens 7 2 Processor configuration s sssesesesseseseseeseseseeseseseeo 2 3 MOGU V asoni ond eeatesadienrenes 4 70 projection channel assignment ccceeee 6 13 PSCUCOCOIOL 00 ceeeceesseceessecessecesseeees 4 4 4 5 4 12 Quad Analog Video Card CONTO Dana sN O 4 22 EEEE E E A A E 7 14 module video s ooseeeeseeessesseeesseeseeseee 4 6 4 12 Ordea 3 22 3 37 3 39 PODEU CS uss n 4 14 technical Gale siveiscsscsscsieastsaledeidadnndinclar tainted 7 5 Quad SDI Video Card COMMON PINE henian 4 30 INE e E e E E E S 7 14 module video oe eececeeccessccessecesseeeeees 4 6 4 12 OEO T oa AR 3 25 3 37 3 39 PIO DOMICS sceni E NN 4 14 technical Gale sar 7 6 RAID e N AR 3 2 rctrl advanced CONFIGUIATION cc eeeeeeeeeeeee 6 15 redundance hard dikdi C scence cits acted eects ae ttarenes Gs eta 3 3 2 power SUDPDIY ou ceececcscecesecssceseessceseeeesseeseenes 3 5 redundant network adaptel cceeecceseeseeteees 6 16 redundant network COnnectiON ccceeeeeeees 3 30 redundant power mo
116. be set to Send to Client IP mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg2 RTP UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 RTP or UDP has to be configured in accordance with the encoder configuration mpeg4 TCP 0 0 element ON 0 Use port 49500 for TCP for each encoder the streaming port must be differ ent TCP is enabled without sending a string The Barco Indigovision interface tool is required for the streaming mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 The Barco Indigovision interface tool is required for the streaming mjpeg UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 Software viewer is needed to start the multicast stream and for keep alive mpeg2 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0 mpeg4 4 i OFF 7 4 2 4 Operating Encoder compression IP Skip bytes Skip bytes Stream TCP PID manufacturer type algorythm protocol at start at end protocol Lenel Network vido recorder mjpeg UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 TCP is not enabled for the Streaming video card Mavix MediaRacer 100 mpeg2 UDP 12 0 auto ON 0 MediaRacer 150 Multiple ports for TCP possible Startstring Mavix Mavix MediaRacer 100 mpeg4 UDP 12 0 auto ON 0 MediaRacer 150 Multiple ports for TCP possible Startstring Mavix Mobotix D10Di FixDome M22 mxpeg UDP 0 0 auto ON 0 Startstring Mobotix GET control faststream jpg Sy Sire eeli PEGS Te 5 000 Tele IL Gia ial Signaling method is HTTP signaling is supported The stream is a unicast stream Resolutions up to 1280x576 supported NiceVision Fast Video Security mpeg2 RTP 4 0 auto OFF 0 EN
117. ble usage usage for following connections a O w O a O i wu u 2 go O Ta ier Cc O T l T Xx z w D eL O LLJ F 2 Se s Sla Sa O gt Ec e Z AAA PS PS D T eS 290 p U T E O gt Os C C aw ES Ss GE D Y gt G EC G oe eres Lelen Je amp sa Pee Onboard LAN adapter 10 100 1000 notOK OK notOK OK not OK Onboard LAN adapter aGs 3390 2 10 100 1000 OK OK OK OK not OK Ethernet card 100 Mbps desktop PCI 10 100 not OK OK OK OK OK Ethernet card 1000 Mbps desktop PCI 10 100 1000 notOK OK OK OK not OK Ethernet card 1000 Mbps desktop PCle 10 100 1000 notOK OK OK OK not OK Ethernet card 100 Mbps server PCI 10 100 OK OK OK OK OK Ethernet card 1000 Mbps server PCI 10 100 1000 OK OK OK OK not OK Ethernet card 1000 Mbps server PCle 10 100 1000 OK OK OK OK not OK version containing Etherboot code Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______LLLL 3 30 3 Getting started In a distributed system the rendering machines are booted via the sub net by means of packets sent by the central device Therefore the network adapter in the rendering machines must be ca pable to boot via a network For the TRANsForm A system there exist two different possibilities to achieve this It depends on the hardware that is used in your TRANSFoRM A system which one of these two methods is used Former systems used spe
118. c engines 255 255 255 0 Graphic Engines Configuration Enter number of graphic engines 2 IP address for engine 1 192 168 1 1 Ethernet address for engine 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a0 c0 83 76 98 Screen arrangement for engine 1 Width x Height 2x4 2x2 Position for engine 1 X Y 0 0 Graphic card type for engine 1 1 AGX 3000 2 gt AGX 3281 Enter the graphic card type 1 2 Configuring the Depth Resolution Bit Per Pixel 256 colors 64K colors 16M colors 16M colors 1 for 8 bpp 2 for 16 bpp 3 for 32 bpp 4 for 32 bpp xww ye yw yw Enter the Depth Resolution 3 2 Configuring the Visual Class A visual class describes the characteristics of a virtual colormap that has been or can be created for use a particular screen The following visual class are supported 1 TrueColor read only visual Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ ___1__1___1__1__ 3 65 2 DirectColor read write visual Enter the Visual Class 1 1 IP address for engine 2 192 168 1 2 Ethernet address for engine 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a0 c0 83 54 77 Screen arrangement for engine 2 Width x Height 2x4 2x2 Position for engine 2 X Y 0 0 2 0 Graphic card type for engine 2 1 AGX 3000 2 AGX 3281 Enter the graphic card type 1 2 Configuring the Depth Resolution Bit Per Pixel 1 for 8 bpp 256 colors 2 for 16 bpp 6
119. ce client rctrlservice can be operated interactively or command by command The rctrlservice client can be started as follows rctrlservice lt option gt Following options are available option argument default meaning h lt hostname gt ore OS E Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started p POE ME cA Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed e lt exec command gt Specifies desired command Table 4 38 The rctrlservice client accepts following commands command meaning restartxserv Restarting X Server stopxserv Halting X Server shutdownmmt Rebooting TRANSFORM A haltmmt Halting TRANSFORM A help Returning a list and short descriptions of all available commands exit Exits the client Table 4 39 If the client is operated interactively it prompts rctrlservice gt gt The commands can be shortened by unam biguous short cuts Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111 4 55 rctrileg 4 Operating The OverView mL client rct rlleg can be operated interactively or command by command The client rctrlleg can be started as follows rctrlleg lt option gt Following options are available option h P ge argument default meaning lt hostname gt ore OS E Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started c pPOorE Ins Seas Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be change
120. ce must be connected to a monitor Torm Refer to section 3 2 5 Graphic cards please Connect the rendering machines with the central processor and the OmniBus devices with the rendering processors Refer to section 3 2 14 Distributed system please 3 3 2 Switching on e in an OmniBus configuration Using OmniBus A18 first make sure that the power switches 26 Figure 3 11 of all connected OmniBus A18 devices are on The LED operating status 3 Figure 3 10 on each OmniBus A18 should show a red light Check also that the power switches 35 Figure 3 5 on the rear of the Processor if available are switched on Using OmNiBus A12 just make sure that the red LED standby component failed 6 Figure 3 7 is perma nently on indicating Standby mode Then switch on the Processor by pressing the power button 13 Figure 3 1 on its front By means of the remote power on off mechanism all TRANSForm A devices are now centrally switched on and initialized in the necessary order The LED operating status of the OmniBus A18 should show a green light and the LED power on 4 on the OmniBus A12 should be lighting e Ina Processor configuration switch on the Processor by pressing the power button 13 Figure 3 1 on the front If also an EXTENDER is used switch it on first by pressing the On Off switch 3 Figure 3 13 ae The order in which the central Processor and the rendering Processors are switched on is of no importance Barco Tran
121. cial rendering Ethernet cards that carried Etherboot code which requested the needed boot packets as soon as the central device had booted With Processor models acs 3328 2 and from X server release 3 48 on no special rendering Ethernet cards are needed any longer anyhow the usage of these cards remains supported Instead PXE the Pre eXecution Envi ronment is used For reliable function of this mechanism it is necessary that wake on LAN WOL is configured in the server configuration see section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system and that WOL is also enabled in the BIOS of the mainboard of the respective rendering machines see section 6 1 11 BIOS settings for rendering machines Connectors The onboard LAN adapter the 100 Mbps and the 1000 Mbps network card each offer a Twisted Pair connection DATA ACT LNK ACT LNKA om tom 10 0 100 GRN 10 OFF 1000 ORG 100 GRN 1000 YLW s E Fe a lee as 4 j e eth0 eth1 Figure 3 35 Connecting to Twisted Pair RJ 45 Onboard LAN adapters on AGS 3390 2 left Onboard LAN adapter on AGS 3389 and AGS 3328 2 3 middle left 1000 Mbps Ethernet Card PCI middle right and 1000 Mbps Ethernet Card PCle right Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1__1_1 3 31 3 Getting started Order The PCI Express network card is inserted in the first PCle
122. cify the configuration in EOSconfig Therefore you find here an instruction about it The syntax of the video section is as follows e For each rendering machine there must be a single line starting with the rendering machine s name e g engine 1l e In this line the video adapters of this rendering machine must be listed The position where the entry of an adapter is located defines the corresponding video channel e The first position in the line corresponds with video channel 1 the second position with video channel 2 etc e The entries in one line are separated by a space e f no video adapter of that rendering machine uses a particular video channel then a 0 has to be in that position e if multiple rendering machines have an entry for a video adapter at the same position this means that these adapters form together a logical video channel e There may be blank lines and comments starting with a character for better clarity It is e g helpful to have a commented line that lists the available video channels and makes the positions for the video adapt ers more obvious You may not mix adapters of input cards of different type to one logical video channel Quad Analog Video Card FRG 3292 and Quad Analog Video Card R9842986 are also input cards of different type Dual RGB Input Cards and Streaming Video Cards may not be used to set up a logical video channel Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual R
123. click in the canvas panel raises the control panel another click dismisses it Q pressed If no signal is connected to a video channel the corresponding video window appears in background color If a signal is connected later the Channel Port or Live button must be Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1__1__1__1__1__1 4 20 4 Operating Except from the control panel the video can be controlled by using short cut keys also Information about the shortcut keys can be read in the help or in the table below Shortcut b lt up gt lt down gt c lt up gt lt down gt s lt up gt lt down gt r lt up gt lt down gt g lt up gt lt down gt lt up gt lt down gt SHIFT r v lt number gt h lt number gt h lt number gt SHIFT v SHIFT s p lt number gt pa f d f0 f1 f2 f3 f4 SHIFT SHIFT i SHIFT t SHIFT c SHIFT d SHIFT h CTRLe QAVC QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD FRG 3292 only Applicable for QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB DRGB DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QAVC SVC DDVI DRGB DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC QSDI SVC DDVI DRGB QAVC
124. col AXIS mjpeg TCP 0 0 auto ON 0 Use port 80 for TCP and indicate the encoder IP address signaling method is http signaling is supported 206 Startstring example Axis241Q GET axis cgi mjpg S wildee coal Buewe 1 Oia ia 206M Startstring example Axis241Q GET axis cgi mjpg S Wwilelae cea ec iL O Via Va Resolutions with 1280 horizontal pixels are not supported 207 207W 210 Startstring example Axis2410Q GET axis cgi mjpg 210A 211 211A video cgi HTTP 1 0 n n 213 PTZ 214 PTZ 216FD 225FD 231D 231D 232D 232D 241S 241SA 2425S IV 221 Startstring example Axis241Q0 GET axis cgi mjpg S amp S wilelac o e i 0 ia Va Up to 30 frames sec 240Q Startstring example Axis241Q GET axis cgi mjpg Si igloo mec le aine e 10 in ta 241Q 241QA Startstring example Axis241Q0 GET axis cgi mjpg En icleo weg ie cine e ale inn eta A maximum use of 4 4CIF streams with a maximum quality of 75 or at least 25 compression is recommended Barco TransForm SCN scn UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______LLL _ 4 26 Encoder manufacturer type BOSCH NWC 0455 Dinion NWC 0455 DinionXF Videojet8008 VIP X1 VIP X1600 VIP X2 BOSCH Videojet 10 Video jet 1000 Videojet Xpro VIP 10 VIP 1000 BOSCH Videojet 1000 Video jet 8000 Videojet Xpro VIP 1000 Cieffe NETTUNO Coretec VCX
125. config Invoke reconfiguration bulb lt number all gt Switch lamp on off lt on off gt info lt number all1 gt Scan status of OverView cube restime Reset operating hours to zero version Get version number exit Exits the client 4 Operating Table 4 42 Table 4 43 If the client is operated interactively it prompts rct rl1dlp gt gt The commands can be shortened by unambiguous short cuts Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 rctripsi 4 Operating The OverView mMP or ATLAS67C4 PSI client rct rlpsi can be operated interactively or command by command The client rctrlpsi can be started as follows rctrlpsi lt option gt Following options are available option argument default meaning h lt hostname gt ore OS E Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started p POE ME cA Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed e lt exec command gt Specifies desired command S Starting client in special mode for re setting operation hours The client accepts following commands command meaning Returns a list and short descriptions of all available commands help Returns a list and short descriptions of all available commands enable Activate auto config mode disable Deactivate auto config mode reconfig Invoke reconfiguration bulb lt number all gt Switch lamp on off lt on off gt info lt number all1 gt Sc
126. connection 27a and the power switch 26a On the left side there may be another mains connection 27b and the power switch 26b for a second power module for redundant operation depending on the configuration of the TRANsForm A To the left of the standard mains con nection there may be a connection for the equipotential bondig conductor 28 To protect the OmniBus A18 from overheating the air supply openings in the case shall be kept free of obstructions To disconnect the OmniBus A18 from the power supply all power cords have to be pulled of the mains connection 27a and 27b Therefore the back panel has to be easily accessible Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Y ___1__1__1__1__1__1_1 3 11 3 Getting started The expansion slots The OmniBus A18 provides 18 PCI slots 7 24 for insertion of UGX or AGX GRAPHIC CARDS OMNISCALER QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARDS DUAL RGB INPUT CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD and STREAMING VIDEO CARD CPU link PCIO PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 PCI7 PCI8 PCI9 PCI10 PCI11 PCI12 PCI13 PCI14 PCI15 PCI16 PCI 17 board slot Figure 3 12 numbering of slots on the back panel of OmniBus A18 Connector CPU board is reserved for the CPU board and connector link slot is reserved for the connection to Processor In the following sections reference is taken to the numbering of the PCI slots 0 17 Barco TransForm A X Termin
127. contact Barco please The battery is empty Ask an authorized person to re place it by a fresh one Check the removable frame of the hard disk drive if it is inserted properly and locked If the error message remains after restarting TRANSFORM A contact Barco please In some Processor configurations with the PROCESSOR AGS 3390 the BIOS has problems to allocate system resources during BIOS initialization Usually this does not impair normal system operation Press lt F1 gt or disable the option Halt on all errors in the BIOS setup Table 8 1 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 111111 82 8 Troubleshooting 8 2 TransForm A does not boot from CD Check if booting from CD is enabled in the mainboard BIOS setup CD needs to have higher booting order than the hard drive Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 8 3 8 3 Hot line Feel free to contact us if you have any further questions Barco N V Europe President Kennedypark 35 B 8500 Kortrijk Phone 32 56 36 82 82 Fax 32 56 368 251 E mail support controlrooms barco com Web www barcocontrolrooms com Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 8 Troubleshooting 8 4 9 Index 1X2 XGA SENOS ceciren dap 6 23 abbreviated configuration uu eet eceteeteeteeteeees 6 8 adjusting PIESE iooni E 4 35 Sd USMENO
128. correlation between color mode of the X Server and the video RGB window is listed in the table below Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 5 4 Operating Module video With Module Video the video or RGB signals of the QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD or DUAL RGB INPuT CARD are displayed without borders and fitted to complete projection modules 1 to nxn depending on configuration The same color capabilities apply as with movable and scalable video and RGB windows Please refer also to section 4 6 3 The Xvideo client for more details Dual RGB Input Card The DuaL RGB INPuT Card offers the possibility to provide RGB data either in 16 bpp RGB 5 6 5 or in 24 bpp RGB 8 8 8 Switching between these two modes requires a restart of the X server with the respective option set please refer to section 6 1 5 X server parameters Overview of color capabilities The following table lists color depth and format of the video and of the X clients in dependence of color depth and visual class of the X server The video and RGB color format applies with module video as well as with video in a window QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DuaL RGB INPUT CARD application windows of QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD Duar DVI INPUT CARD PseudoColor 8 bit Video in YUV4 2 2 multi color depth V
129. d lt exec command gt Specifies desired command Table 4 40 The client accepts following commands command meaning bulb lt number gt all gt lt on off gt Switching off lamp aux lt number gt all gt lt on off gt Switching to analog controller info lt number gt all gt Scanning status of OverView cube help exit Returning a list and short descriptions of all available commands Exits the client Table 4 41 If the client is operated interactively it prompts rct rlleg gt gt The commands can be shortened by unambiguous short cuts Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 4 56 rctridip The OverView mD client rct r1dlp can be operated interactively or command by command The client rctr1dlp can be started as follows rctrldlp lt option gt Following options are available option argument default meaning h lt hostname gt ore OS E Specifies hostname or IP address where the daemon is started p POE ME cA Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed e lt exec command gt Specifies desired command Switch off broadcast mode The client accepts following commands command meaning Returns a list and short descriptions of all available commands help Returns a list and short descriptions of all available commands enable Activate auto config mode disable Deactivate auto config mode re
130. d 32 000 seconds Default time 5 n timeout This parameter sets the limit If the counter in the server exceeds the value timeout reset of the Processor is carried out Values are valid between 5 and 32 000 Default timeout 10 lt ip address gt sets the ip address of the Processor As an alternative the hostname can also be set y switches verbose on y Prior to reset a question is asked whether the reset should be carried out or not if the parameter y is not set If argusreset is started with y set reset is carried out without remark There are two main usages of argusreset e Started with the options p and lt ip address gt only resets the Processor at once e Started with the options c p t n lt ip address gt activates controlling One can deactivate the client argusreset with lt Ctr1 C gt SIGINT The client sends a message about deacti vation to the server No deactivation message is sent for all other interrupts argusd The server can be started with the following command line options Arqusd gt p port Option meaning ie POLL specifies the port Default 13456 Port address of server and client must be identical Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1__1 __1__1__1__1_W 6 27 6 Advanced configuration Up to five clients may connect to the server When starting an additional client the values for time and timeout are only m
131. deo Card video decoder de interlacer scaler CPU Frame Memory input formats colors video standard bus power supply power consumption operating conditions dimensions weight connectors 7 Technical appendix via scaler algorithm in FPGA for 1 1 or downscaling Base T Ethernet 10 100 1000Mbps MPEG 2 ISO 13818 MP ML 4 2 0 MPEG 4 part 2 ISO 14496 2 ASP L5 Visiowave PAL NTSC 1 4 streams per board stream resolution up to 4CIF or D1 MPEG 2 up to 15Mbps per stream MPEG 4 part 2 up to 8Mbps per stream MPEG 2 iMPath NKF MPEG 4 part 2 Acti Axis Cieffe Coe Coretec Cornet Hisome Mavix NKF Teleste Vbrick Verint VideoBridge Visiowave VisioWave UDP RTP RTCP and RTSP IGMP v3 internal data path YUV 4 2 2 16 bit wide PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 2 3 3 V 0 3 V 5V 2 7A 3 3V 3 9A 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm 500 g 1 x 64 bit 3 3 V 5 V PCI edge connector 2 x RJ45 connector 8 pin for redundant connection Table 7 8 4 x SAA 118E Median filter FPGA via scaler algorithm in FPGA for 1 1 or downscaling 64MB SDRAM CVBS PAL B D G H I N NTSC M N 4 43 SECAM internal data path YUV 4 2 2 16 bit wide ITU R601 and ITU R656 compatible PCI bus 64 bit 3 3 5 V max 66 MHz 5 V 2 3 3 V 0 3 V 12 V 10 12 V 10 5V 0 8A 3 3V 2 5A 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI
132. dispaly area OMNIBUS 1 video1 video2 video3 video4 19 0 19 1 19 2 1 9 3 video5 video6 video7 videos 1 10 0 1 10 1 110 2 1 10 3 video9 video10 video11 video12 1 11 0 1 11 1 1 11 2 1 11 3 video13 video0o14 video15 video16 1 12 0 112 1 112 2 1 12 3 lt lt V S S YV ii OMNIBUS 2 FI Z YV Y Y Y Y Y VY S Y VY OMNIBUS 1 PCI PROCESSOR Figure 3 52 system configuration with digital output and partial usage of OMNISCALERS Therefore two OmniBus devices in a monolithic system are used OmNiBus 1 is used for graphic cards The output of the graphic cards 4 8 is directly displayed on the projection modules on the right side of the display wall dis play area OmniBus 1 The output of the graphic cards 0 3 is provided to the OmniScALers in the OmniBus 2 for video integration The output of the OmniScALers is displayed on the left part of the display wall display area OmniBus 2 On this area 16 video windows can be displayed and freely scaled and moved If a video window is moved to the display of OmniBus 1 the window appears with the background color Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11 3 45 3 Getting started 3 3 Startin
133. dow with Position e f necessary tune Phase until the test pattern is displayed without flicker Managing the presets As already mentioned a set of presets is pre configured in the video client These presets are stored in a preset file The current preset file can be modified in the Registry tab i e you can replace an existing timing by your own settings or add these to the list of timings The video client can handle more than one preset file From the File menu you can choose to save the current preset file or read in another A certain preset file can also be invoked as an option on the command line when starting the video client Please refer to section 4 6 5 The options Configuration of the RGB display Back in the Control tab you can adjust the RGB display regarding red green blue and brightness etc The video client can store these settings as well as the selected RGB channel and preset in a configuration file From the File menu you can choose to save the current configuration or read another A certain configuration file can also be invoked as an option on the command line when starting the video client Please refer to section 4 6 5 The options Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____ 4 36 4 Operating 4 6 5 The options The video client accepts the following options on the command line The options are listed together with their respective arg
134. ductor Figure 3 8 Rear view of OmniBus A12 In total there are 14 card slots visible from the back with the left two positions having a fixed assignment for the link interface card 9 and the CPU board 10 Graphic cards OmniScalers and input cards 11 22 follow depending on the configuration of TRANSFORM A On the left there are three power modules each with a mains connection 24 and a LED to indicate the power status 25 On the lower part there is a connection for the equipotential bondig conductor 26 To disconnect the OmniBus A12 from the power supply all power cords have to be pulled of the mains connection 24 Therefore the back panel has to be easily accessible To protect the OmniBus A12 from overheating the air supply openings in the case shall be kept free of obstructions To ensure power redundancy take care to connect each of the power modules to an independent power net Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 3 8 3 Getting started The expansion slots The OmniBus A12 provides 12 PCI slots 11 22 for insertion of UGX GRAPHIC CARDS OMNISCALER QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARDS DUAL RGB INPUT CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD and STREAMING VIDEO CARD link CPU PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 PCI6 PCI7 PCI8 PCI9 PCI10 PCI11 PCI 12 slot board Figure 3 9 numbering of slots on the back panel of OMNIBUS A12 Connector CPU board i
135. dule cceeecsecseeseeeees 3 13 refresh rate CONFIGUIATION 0 cece ceesseseeeeeeeeeee 3 55 9 Index release integrity Utility eee eeeeeee 4 69 remote extension DOX cccccessceceseeseeeseeseesees 3 16 EMOEPONE cto ena ete 4 8 remote power on off 0 ccccceeeteeteeseeseeeenes 3 6 Remote Conto nenene e E 4 52 ELA a AE EAE E A ET EE re 4 53 OL KOS esaa sraieclenanetortaasoascnmet 6 15 Remote Control client eee eens 4 9 4 53 rendering machines ASSINE NT oerna a ANS 3 33 CADRO onis 3 33 CINANUNG E E E E E E A 6 14 CONNUS O Mani Sats asta acestnaden taceeeen eas 3 61 GE ORME UY orea astecqasesersus pecans 6 10 P addis x cases nS 3 61 NEtWOrK CId Srian a 3 30 PIO CHING inai cesta cect nucecantened i cercnes 3 51 resolution Of video WINKOW ccccccseeseeteeeees 4 17 FESOURCC TIES aona T 4 43 BEDE S AA EEE A A T 4 44 resources of the rctrl elass wo ee eceeseeeeeeees 4 63 Festart DUM OM ceina AN 3 3 restart X server utility oo ee eeseeeeeeeeee 4 66 restore procedure cecccesccsscssceseesseeseeeesseesees 4 68 REA a a a 3 16 RGB 24 DDD cecccccscscccssseccessssscecssssssccsssssecssenecesees 6 9 RGB display configuration cee eeeeseeeeeeees 4 36 RGB values definition ec ecececsecesceteeteeeseeees 4 3 Bas ne E et ene ere ee 7 16 root background configuration cece 4 10 SCLESTIES deN NIO ereraa 4 2 SCLECIISAV CL aaae E E teatetes 4 9 E ANTEE E N 4 16 SED date SECR
136. e eee tel I Determine preset as line number in preset file MEE il selects the input card ieee 1 selects the adapter on the input card awe Sie LIL Live select display mode Table 4 24 Options concerning config and preset files option configFile CE noConfigFile ncf presetFile factoryPresetFile fpf mpgPresetFile mpgpf mpgBoardFile mpgbf argument default meaning lt filename gt ee N on a xavgiiele or eens specifies user configuration file user configuration file will not be read lt filename gt Ce Meon LG OIE SEIL e specifies preset file for RGB and YPrPb input lt filename gt Goin MMIC eo tie sqmide joteo ae bo metas specifies factory preset file for RGB input see Table 7 13 read if no other preset file is specified etc MMTconfig mpgpresets prs specifies streaming video preset file lt filename gt lt filename gt pcee MM conmdtaitey mocioe ance ont specifies configuration file for STREAMING VIDEO CARDS Table 4 25 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __ ___1__1__1__1___ 4 4 4 Operating X 11 window geometry The geometry variable of an X 11 window specifies its size and its placement on the screen The geometry specified with the geometry resource has the form lt w gt x lt h gt lt xoff gt lt yoff gt Here w and h give the width and height of the window m
137. e assigned in the Channel Reordering section If you want to reorder the projection channels enter y By entering n this section will be skipped X Server s Channel Reordering This is the reordering configuration part of the X Server It offers the possibility to define the reordering channels section The channels section defines the assignment of graphic channels to projection channels Please read the section X Server Configuration in the User s Manual Eos X Terminal Do you want to proceed yes no no y The order can be changed only within the rendering machines graphic engines First the engine has to be indi cated then the graphic channels default and the projection channels new can be entered The correlation between graphic channels and projection channels is explained in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A channels Please have a look there to have a further explanation Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLL 3 62 3 Getting started Channel Reordering for the Distributed X Server Assign to a default graphic channel within a graphic engine a new position in the Display Wall Enter graphic engine s number for reordering 1 1 Channel Reordering 1 redefine reordering 2 take default no reordering Enter selection 1 1 Enter the list of the default channels 1 2 123 4 Enter the list of the new channel
138. e pe eer e IM selects the STREAMING VIDEO CARD with the number lt n gt and channel lt m gt as genlock signal nlro Selects the QUAD SDI V pEo Caro with the number lt n gt the first channel of the card is used as genlock signal selects the first video input card as genlock signal returns a list with information if genlock is activated and which card is used for the genlock signal returns a list with the state of the UGX or AGX GraPHic Caros refresh rate is repeats the option state lt 1 gt times shows the version of the boot loader genlock can be used from boot loader version 204 on reads and applies the default configuration file Writes the current genlock settings into the default configuration file these settings are applied automatically after each restart reads and applies the configuration file that is specified with lt file gt writes the current genlock settings into a configurations file with the name lt file gt Table 4 55 options of the xgenlock utility Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1__1__1__1__1__1__1_ 4 71 4 Operating When using genlock make sure that the cabling for genlock has been established as Q explained in section 3 2 15 CPU board If an external signal is connected only external may be selected If selecting internal or a video signal it will be disturbed by the external signal Therefore the exter
139. easured in pixels The values xoff and yoff give the offset in pixels from the screen s left edge and top edge respectively If the preceding is replaced by xoff and yoff give the offset of the screen s right edge or bottom edge For example SUO0R4 00 Z00F1L00 width 300 pixel height 400 pixel top left corner positioned at x 200 y 100 relative to the top left corner of the screen 300x400 width 300 pixel height 400 pixel position not specified 300x400 200 100 width 300 pixel height 400 pixel top right corner positioned at x 200 y 100 relative to the top right corner of the screen 300x400 200 100 width 300 pixel height 400 pixel bottom right corner positioned at x 200 y 100 relative to the bottom right corner of the screen You can omit any of the elements in the geometry specification e g the position in canvasGeom 300x400 The window manager a special client controlling the layout of the windows will use default val ues for the missing elements Example for canvasDisplay The canvas and control panel can be displayed on different desktops The control panel can be directed to any host computer with the option display In this case the canvas panel can be directed to TRANSForM A with the option canvasDisplay canvas display control X Window Fig
140. eck the names of the network adapters by means of the procfg utility see section 4 8 7 Network reporting utility procfq Below you can read through a typical course of the configuration script expanded with comments giving more details KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKK T BARCO iANS configuration script x KO gt oe The configuration process will now ask you to enter your selection for the Intel R Advanced Network Services 1AN3 KKEKKKKKKKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KEKK Do You want to continue Y n y First enter y to start with the configuration In the following the script presents you a list with the available net work adapters You are prompted to select the network adapters that form one team The AFT team of TRANSFORM A is called bteamoO First enter the number of the network adapter that shall be the primary adapter Anew a list is shown but without the already selected adapter Enter the number of the next member of the team When all team members are selected enter 0 to continue with the configuration Select members for team bteam0 done etho ethl eth2 RMPwN FO Select members for team bteam0 0 done 1 ethl 2 eth2 1 Select members for team bteam0 0 done 1 eth2 0 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008
141. ect or indirect damage and also damage attributed to the operation of software as well as to other services provided by Barco being a component of the system or independent services will be deemed invalid provided the damage is not proven to be attributed to the absence of properties guaranteed in writing or due to the intent or gross negligence on the part of Barco If the purchaser or a third party carries out modifications or repairs on good delivered by Barco or if the goods are handled incorrectly in particular if the systems are commissioned or operated incorrectly or if after the transfer of risks the goods are subject to influences not agreed upon in the contract all guarantee claims of the purchaser will be rendered invalid Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are attrib uted to programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser e g interfaces Normal wear as well as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco either The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations specified in this manual must be complied with by the customer Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 iil Revision sheet To e Barco Control Rooms GmbH An der Rossweid 5 D 76229 Karlsruhe Phone 49 721 6201 0 Fax 49 721 6201 298 E mail docu de bcd barco com Web www barcocontrolrooms com From Date
142. ection cubes on the top Graphic channel 3 Port 0 of Board 2 shall display the information of the leftmost projection cubes on the middle row and is therefore correlated with the projection channel 6 etc You may insert blank lines and comments starting with a character for better clarity channels graphic channel numbers 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 projection channel numbers 6 711121617 3 4 5 8 91013 14 15 Reassigning a system with rendering machines the name of the concerned rendering machine has to be men tioned as well channels engine 2 graphic channel numbers 123 4 projection channel numbers 2341 engine 3 graphic channel numbers 234 projection channel numbers 42 3 The graphic channels of the rendering machine 1 and the graphic channel 1 of the rendering machine 3 remain unchanged It is just possible to reassign the channels within the displayed area of a rendering machine To change size or place of the displayed area see section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system please Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __ 6 14 6 Advanced configuration rctrl This section starts with the keyword rct ri and defines the hot keys for Remote Control If the rctr1 section does not contain any data the default setting applies retrl retrl_enable 1 retrl_key_1 XK_Control_L rctrl_key_2 XK_Shift_L
143. ection of USB devices After connecting a USB device it has to be mounted Irrespective of the connected USB mouse or keyboard devices it has to be mounted as the first SCSI device Memory sticks which usually use the FAT file format require in addition the option t vfat Thus the following command must be used to mount an additional device mount dev sdal t vfat mnt usb If using several additional USB devices the SCSI devices are numbered consecutively Enabling Disabling hot plug detection Hot plug detection is by default enabled but the system can be configured to change this setting permanently or temporarily To disable hot plug detection permanently enter the following to the command line and reboot afterwards chkconfig hotplug on To enable hot plug again enter the following and reboot chkconfig hotplug off To change the setting only during the runtime of the system the service utility can be used by entering service hotplug stop to switch hot swap off and service hotplug start to switch hot swap on But after a reboot the last configuration of chkconfig will be valid again Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 6 18 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 9 Nearby color allocation In order to ensure that X clients can allocate their colors in 8 bit PseudoColor mode even if the color map is al ready filled completely the Nearby Color Allocation has been
144. ed on standby mode Power applies at the device but it is not switched on off device is switched on no component failed or device is off no power applies blinking Component failure detected e g one power module failed fan failed over temperature in the device detected the LED stops blinking when the component fail disappears 7 front flap 8 lock of front flap Figure 3 7 Front view of OMNIBUS A12 Behind the front flap of the OmniBus A12 on the lowest position there is the On Off switch 3 On the top posi tion is a buzzer reset button 5 to confirm the failure of a redundant power module Between these two but tons there are two LEDs the green LED power on 4 to the left is indicating if power is on The red LED standby component failed 6 to the right indicates that a redundant power module is not operable Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 37 3 Getting started The back ol T I IN N N x a h ANEN i 56 ee TT SN eee ee a aaa E a a a 26 9 link interface card 10 CPU board 11 22 Barco s expansion cards 23 ventilation slots 24 mains connection of power module 25 LED power status of power module permanent red standby mode Power applies at the module but the device is not switched on permanent green power module OK power output OK off power connection is interrupted 26 connection for equipotential bonding con
145. eeeeeees 7 12 7 13 PGC AEE NOAN seca EEA ONEA TAE 3 37 3 39 DIODETIE S oerrinne teeter teeta 4 12 technical data ccccecsseeseesecseceseessceseessees 7 3 onboard LAN adaptel eee eceeceseesseeeeteeeeeesees 3 30 OM MMS MANU cosssactscedcuctacsoncapebed S 1 8 options CANVAS PANE leraian a 4 38 9 Index config and preset fileS cee eceeseeseeneeeee 4 41 CONUC DANE uoaa 4 37 Dial DV UW DUW Cal decasar 4 40 Dual RGB Input Card n eee ceceseeteeteeeeeenes 4 41 module video and module RGB 000 4 37 Ol VIGO CLOT ysacae saci cncton etek nee speeionianienccvateds 4 37 Quad Analog Video Card oe ceceseseeteeteees 4 38 Quad SDI Video Card 4 39 6 EE A E S E 4 62 Remote Control Atlas wo eee eeeeees 4 58 Remote Control daemon 4 53 Remote Control MONItOF 0 eee 4 54 Remote Control OverView MD s es 4 57 Remote Control OverVieW ML ceeeeeees 4 56 Remote Control OverVieW MP cccceeee 4 58 Remote Control SErVICE c eee ceseeeeeeeeees 4 55 Remote Control switch 4 59 Streaming Video CAI eceeeeeteesseteeteeseeees 4 39 order CodeS meee er aan ee ee en 7 18 OSIGIS esnie a A 2 2 Multiport 1 0 Card icn 3 20 3 7 steencdeneadevassaveteences 3 29 Remote CONtrOl uu eee cece cess eeseseeseeeees 4 52 X server EXTENSION cccccesssccccccessssssteeeeeeeesees 4 8 Osiris advanced configuration 6 15 output signal CONfIgUIAatiON c ce eeeeeeeeeeees 3 55 OVE TA er anaes
146. eesesesnesesesnesessenesesssssnesesssnesesrsnesesseseseeo 6 22 6 1 12 Configuration Of 1x2 XGA SettingS ssesesesnenesesnssesesessesesnesesesnesesesnesesssnesissenesesssnenesisrsnesnssesesreo 6 23 6 113 Plain Vide MOJE serico aa E Ges A a a a ies ee 6 25 6 1 14 System watchdog auto restatt s esennneeeneseseoeseseesesesesseseseesesesnesesesnesesssnesisesssnesesssnesenrsnesnssesesro 6 27 7 Technical oppend ee rn NN 7 1 TV VOCIMALCA AN ae a a a A A A a n cides ules 7 2 TACE a E T telat s ceed aa tears Gee ttaataiata st 7 10 Wo Su 0 1 E Oe E teeter arene ee NER EEE Sen E ORR ry CROONER POU OOo 7 18 8 MOUDIES MOOT G sciccescetetetecereteeds n ashe ata a 8 1 Bel Trans FOMA MOU DO OU x ceccausesatiiscsnciteaisGestopeccaveccatieasen decane ctasleettulecsaencal aura sesectasGedapaucmreugntie ateadaucaneenades 8 2 82 Trons FOr A GOES MOL DOOLIO CDon E E E agastaniatess 8 3 CAO CO a E T E E 8 4 PIE K E A A A E A 9 1 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt vil 1 Introduction 1 Introduction This chapter explains the structure of the manual itself and the used typographic styles and symbols Safety in formation is provided concerning the operation of computer systems from Barco Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt lt 1 1 1 Introduction 1 1 How this manual is organized This manual describes design and startup
147. efore the out connector of the graphic card needs to be connected to the in connector of the OmNISCA LER Only graphic cards in digital mode can be connected DDC information from the projection device is looped through to the graphic card for further processing Connectors The OMNISCALER provides one Dual DVI connector for data insertion from the graphic card and one Dual DVI con nector for digital output for two projection modules port 0 1 in LED port 0 port 0 1 out LED port 1 Figure 3 25 ports of the OMNISCALER In every OMNISCALER card package a Dual DVI to Dual DVI cable is included It serves to connect port 0 1 in of the OMNISCALER with port 0 1 or port 2 3 of the graphic card Figure 3 26 Dual DVI to Dual DVI adapter cable For the connection to the projection modules the Dual DVI to 2xDVI D adapter cable that was provided with the graphic card is used It must be plugged into port 0 1 out of the OMNISCALER Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____LLL 3 20 3 Getting started Order The OmNISCcALER that is connected to the first graphic card as primary graphic adapter lightens also the green LED of the respective graphic channel e inan OmniBus configuration the OmniScALeRrs are inserted into the PCI slots of the OmniBus devices please refer to section 3 2 16 OmniBus e Ina Processor configuration the OMNISCALERS may be inserted in the PCI s
148. efresh rate for the analog outputs is to be specified Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3739 3 Getting started Multi screen server display layout The arrangement of the connected projection modules is specified in the form lt we lt li Here lt w gt and lt h gt give the number of columns and rows For example 4x2 4 monitors next to each other 2 monitors on top of each other Configuring the Monolithic X Server Multiscreen Arrangement Enter the Multi Screen Arrangement Width x Height 2x1 4x2 These are your Output Device settings Graphic Card AGX 3281 Output Device digital Screen Configuration MultiScreen 4x2 Everything correct yes no yes y X Server General Settings Please enter the required settings for Visual Depth Visual Class X Server s background RGB values XDM Font Server Depth resolution Specifying the depth resolution tells X 11 how many colors you want to use Configuring the Depth resolution Bit Per Pixel N B 4 and 5 are Usable only for resolution up to 1400x1050 for 8 bpp 256 colors m l 2 for 16 bpp 64K colors 3 for 32 bpp 16M colors 4 for 8 and 16 bpp MultiDepth MultiColor Default visual PseudoColor 5 for 16 and 8 bpp MultiDepth MultiColor Default visual TrueColor Enter the depth resolution 2 4 Dependent on the configuration and the requirements for vid
149. ely movable video windows or 60 video windows that are movable and scalable within their respective display area Here four freely movable windows and 48 windows that are limited to their display area are shown display area OMNIBUS 4 display area OMNIBUS 5 display area OMNIBUS 6 video 1 video 2 video 3 video 4 video 5 video6 video7 video 8 video 17 video 18 video 19 video 20 video 21 video 22 video 23 video 24 video 33 video 34 video 35 video 36 video 37 video 38 video 39 video 40 112 0 12 1 112 2 112 3 113 0 13 1 113 2 113 3 112 0 112 1 112 2 112 3 113 0 13 1 113 2 113 3 112 0 112 1 112 2 12 3 113 0 113 1 113 2 13 3 T I I I T T T T T T T T video 9 video 10 video 11 video 12 video 134 video 14 video 15 video 16 video 25H video 26 video 27 video 28 video 29 video 30 video 311 video 32 video 41 video 42 video 431 video 44 video 45 video 46 video 471 video 48 114 0 114 1 114 2 114 3 115 0 15 1 115 2 115 3 114 0 14 1 114 2 114 3 115 0 15 1 115 2 115 3 114 0 14 1 114 2 115 0 115 1 115 2 115 3 ideo i Ipgic channel 4 logi channel 1 ib 3 4 video logic channel 2 116 1 video logic channel 16 2 Tre ee a r OMN
150. ens 4 60 9 Index GRAY SCAN teu ier cstod natoter nccatat T 4 4 GUI kemote Contolera aan es 4 60 hard disk CiVE c eee eesccsscescescesscsscessessceseesseeseens 3 3 Hermes D2D Remote Control client 4 53 4 59 Hermes DXD Remote Control client 4 53 4 59 Hermes V2A Remote Control client 4 53 4 59 Hermes VXA Remote Control client 4 53 4 59 hot plug pard disk GUY C eonna 32 DOW ON MOdUlG csser 3 13 power SUDDIY s cdasiiessacsatsacdbaciohends shisedisileseeds clones 3 5 hot keys Remote Control eee 4 64 6 15 PIS IN Cadccotencsesctaccssccd ee smacsdeupeoessbaqpensecn acai 3 26 3 28 MEUCCI d essnee N 4 14 installing new hard Cisk cece cceeceseeseeseeseeteeees 6 3 installing system SOftWALlE ee eeceeeseeseeseeteeeee 6 3 Keep alive teleGraM cccceccceeeteeseeteeseetsesees 4 54 KEV DO GnG is ern eco aon neers 3 6 3 15 PS 72 interface nics is cadesvdstpsddsdlareacenssdasdestarsacriess 7 15 BICC Iye oinaan e ET 6 3 6 6 keyboard CONFIGUIAtION cece eeeteeteeteeteeeees 3 52 keyboard CXtension cccccccsccsscssessceseetsesseesees 3 16 LAN ann 22 330 3335 layout configuration management ccee 4 8 LED primary graphic adaptel c eee 3 18 LEX eee ieed ae eeetee ert Re en eo Tae ornare Serre Meer an aR 3 16 INUXCONT aiioa a 3 49 local area network cece eccecesceseesseeseeteeeseesees 3 30 local extensiom DOX sezona 3 16 l
151. ent possibilities to display the video windows On the one hand a video can be displayed using multiple input channels one from each rendering machine to form one logical video channel Such a video win dow can be displayed freely movable and scalable on the whole wall regardless of the different display areas In our example 20 such video channels could be built On the other hand 60 videos could be displayed each 20 restricted to one display area but within these bounda ries freely movable and scalable Also combinations between these both ways to display video are possible In the example above each rendering machine provides 16 videos that are restricted to their display area input card 12 13 14 and 15 and together they are able to display 4 further videos movable over the whole display wall input card 16 Please refer also to section 4 6 2 The video channels To build larger display walls simply connect further rendering machines to the sub net By this virtually unlim ited display walls can be set up all being configured in the way explained in the example above Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ __1 __1__1__1__1__1__1_1_ 3 44 3 Getting started System with digital output and partial video Below is an example of a system with 36 channels and digital output Only a limited number of projection mod ules need to display video dispaly area OMNIBUS 2
152. entered directly with hot keys on the TRANSForM A keyboard hot keys meaning CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT lt number of module gt o Switching on lamp CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT lt number of module gt f Switching off lamp CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT lt number of unit gt a Switching to analog input In 1 CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT lt number of unit gt d Switching to digital input In 2 Table 4 51 The keys Ctrl left left Control key and Shift left left Shift key must be pressed until the hot key sequence is finished by entering the number of the respective projection module and the desired command In the configuration file of TransForm A the hot keys can be re configured See section 6 1 6 S Advanced configuration of TransForm A Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __ _ 4 64 4 Operating 4 8 Utilities 4 8 1 Show wallinfo utility The X Server provides information about the hardware of the display wall and its setup This information can be requested as follows showwallinfo lt option gt The following options are available option argument value meaning zgo pE gt Op l lt display gt must be specified in two parts hostname displaynumber For the hostname the name of the TRansForm A or its IP must be specified With the displaynumber the X Server is specified 0 must be indicated for the display of TRANSFORM A 1 must be indicated for Osiris F lt
153. eo the depth resolution must be selected An ex tensive overview about correlation between settings of X 11 and the display of video as well as an explanation of multi color depth is given in section 4 2 2 Color capabilities An overview about bandwidth requirements of video and RGB in dependence of color depth is given in section 4 6 1 The input cards Visual class Specifying a visual class tells X 11 how to handle colors This is only asked if you selected above the numbers 2 or 4 Refer also to section 4 2 Color management for a more detailed description please Background of the X server The background of the X server can be set Specify if you want to set your individual background color and how In RGB values red is 255 0 0 green is 0 255 0 and blue is 0 0 255 You can choose any combination of these colors within the range of 0 to 255 Configuring the X Server s background Do you want set the X Server s background color yes no yes yes Enter the RGB values range 0 255 0 0 0 40 40 200 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 3 56 3 Getting started X display manager The X display manager xdm is a system process which manages a user session from the login to the logout xdm provides a flexible and configurable method for logging in with an X server Refer to section 4 3 X Display manager for a more detailed description please Entering y
154. es The manual pages can be read by entering man procfg into the command line Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______L 4 70 4 8 8 Genlock utility 4 Operating The genlock utility enables alternatively to the window manager access to the genlock functionality please refer also to section 4 5 Window manager But it offers also access to advanced functionality that is not operable by means of the window manager In interactive mode entering xgenlock in the command line starts the utility xgenlock xgenlock gt gt In the following the options can be entered e g on to switch on genlock xgenlock gt gt on The following table lists the options of xgenlock option help guir OnE on external internal Pene lt i gt lt i gt davron Oan lt M SC an SCILSViNG lt i ELE SES VIN LAEG state MOn aLigve lt lt IL version rdef wdef cas Sir wllaes was lt file gt value meaning lists all options of xgenlock quits the utility switches genlock off switches genlock on selects an external source as genlock signal selects the first UGX or AGX GRAPHIC CARD as genlock signal eile ou meee Or S Ae selects the QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD with the number lt n gt and channel lt m gt as genlock signal ad oe ete Oe selects the Duar DVI INPUT Card with the number lt n gt and channel lt m gt as genlock signal e
155. es with EN55022 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 and the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Electromagnetic immunity of TRANSForm A complies with EN55024 This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 1 3 2 Precautions For your own protection observe the following safety precautions when installing operating and servicing your device e Before operating the units please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference e Observe all warnings and instructions printed on the devices e Servicing not explicitly mentioned in this manual should never be carried out by unauthorized personnel Never open the case of the unit without first disconnecting the power supply cord e To prevent fire or electrical shock hazard do not expose this unit to rain or moisture e This product should be operated from an AC power source e Check that the voltage and frequency of your power supply match those printed on the device label with the rated electrical values e If you are not sure of the type of AC power available consult your dealer or local power company e This product is equipped with a 3 wire grounding plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the o
156. esented with a single binary digit i e a color depth of 1 Many color workstations have a color depth of 8bit each pixel on such a screen is represented by eight bits allowing 2 256 on screen colors A color depth of 24 bits corresponds to 2 16 7 million 16M colors and is said to cover all shades of colors the human eye can distinguish Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 3 4 Operating Visual class Due to the different display capabilities of workstations reaching from a color depth of 1 bit up to 24 bits differ ent strategies for translating pixel values into on screen colors have been developed in the X window system These strategies are called visual classes The X window system defines six visual classes three of them are dynamic PseudoColor GrayScale DirectColor and three are static StaticColor StaticGray TrueColor PseudoColor is a class having a color map in which a pixel value indexes the color map entry to produce an independent RGB value that is the color map is viewed as an array of triples RGB values Shared and private color cells can be allocated e StaticColor can be viewed as a case of PseudoColor in which the RGB values are predefined and read only no private color cells are available GrayScale can be viewed as a case of PseudoColor in which the red green and blue values in any given color map en try are equal and thus produce
157. eserver t Figure 6 6 When the installation is finished you are prompted to press the lt Enter gt key to reboot TRANSFORM A Congratulations EUS installation is complete Press ENTER to reboot and then REMOVE the bootable EOS CD Figure 6 7 The system will reboot now Remove the CD from the drive as soon as the drawer ejects it After this system installation you have also to run through 3 4 1 System configuration and 3 4 2 X 11 configuration and if you have a distributed system through 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system or 3 4 4 Configuring a distributed system with multiple logical screens Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1_____ 65 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 3 Upgrading system software OmniBus configuration All former system software on a TRANSFoRM A in OmniBus configuration can be upgraded to the current version No special considerations are required Processor configuration Upgrading the system software to the current release is only possible if already release 2 4 or higher is installed on the Processor configuration Release 2 3 and earlier can not be upgrated to release 2 4 and higher Instead a complete system installation is necessary Please note that this will delete any data from the harddisk and that also complete configuration is necessary after the installation Information about system installation you find in section 6 1 2 Installi
158. essary for configuration first and then start the script Therefore you are recommended to read through the fol lowing pages of this section before starting the configuration Below you can read through a typical course of the configuration script expanded with comments giving more details Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 53 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKEKK x Argus X11Server Configuration x x Release 4 3 0 c 2008 BARCO i 5 email support bcd barco com Tel 0049 721 6201 0 g Fax 0049 721 6201 298 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKEKK 1 Argus Multi Screen X11Server 2 Argus Distributed X11Server 3 Argus Multiple Logical Screens X11Server 4 Exit Enter your X11Server Configuration 1 1 Customized Configuration yes no no no 3 Getting started The value indicated in square brackets will be taken by simply pressing lt Return gt This can be the default value if the configuration script is running the first time or the value entered during the last configuration The first question allows you to choose between the configuration of a monolithic TransForm A 1 a distributed system 2 or an TRANSForM A configuration with multiple logical screens 3 Entering 4 exits the script o additional parts Configuring a distributed system is largely similar to config
159. evision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLL 6 11 6 Advanced configuration By default there is no video section and a standard assignment is applied see section 4 6 2 The video channels This Standard assignment numbers the individual video adapters in the order of the PCI slots beginning in the order of the rendering engines This means at first the video adapters of the first rendering machine are numbered in the scanning order of the PCI slots followed by the video adapters of the second rendering machine etc With this standard assignment a video is restricted to the display area of the rendering engine where the input card is located Combining a video adapter of one rendering machine with a video adapter of the same type in a different rendering engine to a logical video channel allows displaying the connected video source in a window that is freely movable and displayable across both display areas A logical video channel may contain a video adapter of every rendering engine enabling to move this video on the whole display wall If considering a distributed system with two rendering machines each equipped with one QUAD ANALOG VIDEO Carb the default configuration would correspond to an entry in the video section like this Rendering 1 Rendering 2 video 2 4 6 8 channel 1234567 8 engine 1 12340000 engine 2 0000123 4
160. f connector 16 is for connection to OmniBus devices With the optional connectors external genlock in 17 and external genlock loop through in 15 an external genlock signal can be con nected to multiple Processors and OmNniBus devices PS 2 mouse 26 is for plugging in a PS 2 mouse and PS 2 keyboard 27 is for plugging in a PS 2 keyboard For USB mouse and USB keyboard the USB plugs 28 can be used With the onboard LAN adapter 32 the network connection can be established On the right hand side there are different PCI and PCI Express cards 18 24 inserted depending on the actual hardware configuration of the PROCESSOR To protect the Processor from overheating the air supply openings in the case shall be kept free of obstructions To disconnect the Processor from the power supply all power cords have to be pulled of the mains connection 25 Therefore the back panel has to be easily accessible The expansion slots The Processor AGS 3328 2 3 and AGS 3390 2 provide each six PCI expansion slots for insertion of PCI expansion cards Whereas the Processor AGS 3389 provide four PCI expansion slots for insertion of PCI expansion cards and three PCI Express expansion slots for insertion of 3 party expansion cards The slots are numbered in the follow ing way if looking from the back to the Processor PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI CI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI PCle PCle PCle P x16 x1 x1 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 or 4 2 3 1
161. f video display Start video display Freeze video display Select video card the cards can be renamed Select video channel of the Quan SDI VIDEO Caro max 4 channels the channels can be renamed Shows the detected video standard PAL NTSC Select the frame rate FULL HALF default Table 4 13 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____1__1_1__1___ 4 30 4 Operating Control panel for Dual DVI Input Card Control C R B G S B Live Still DDVI 1 Channel 1 Input Source Standard Preset Deinterlace Figure 4 9 Xvideo control panel Set contrast source type 1 2 4 5 red source type 3 of video display Set brightness source type 1 2 4 5 green source type 3 of video display Set saturation source type 1 2 blue source type 3 of video display Start video display Freeze video display Select one Duar DVI INpuT CARD the cards can be renamed Select video channel of the Duar DVI Input CARD max 2 channels the channels can be renamed 0 Disabled Video channel disabled 1 Composite Enable composite video signal 2 S Video Enable S Video signal 3 RGB Analog Enable analog RGB signal 4 YUV Analog Enable analog component video signal 5 RGB Digital Enable DVI D signal Current timing or preset is indicated in the button Only selectable if Auto Preset is not enabled and for source types 3 4 Select a timing Setting
162. face card in the OmniBus A12 9 Figure 3 8 and in the OmniBus A18 6 Figure 3 11 respectively with a round cable Figure 3 41 round cable for connection of host and OMNIBUS The cable between host and OmniBus is fragile It may not last under tension or being bent or twisted Connecting several OmniBus devices In the Processor AGS 3389 there are four PCI slots for link interface cards available With AGS 3328 five link inter face cards can be used The respective number of OmniBus devices can be connected to one Processor Each OMNI Bus is connected in the manner explained above Order The link interface cards are inserted in the PCI slots of the Processor following the network cards in the slots with the lower numbers If more than one OmniBus is connected they are numbered in the sequence of the PCI slots Link Link Link Link Inter Inter Inter Inter face face face face 1 2 3 4 EES PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 Figure 3 42 Link interface cards in host to connect to multiple OmniBus devices The Processor expects the primary graphic adapter in the first OmniBus Therefore the OmniBus that is connected to the link interface 1 must be equipped with graphic cards Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 3 36 3 Getting started Order of graphic and input cards The graphic cards are numbered consecutively with ascending PCI slots Each OMNISCALE
163. ffice Conf ig Network ing Client tasks Host name and IP network devices Name server specification DNS Routing and gateways Host name search path Network Information System HIS IPX interface setup server tasks Misc Users accounts Norma l special accounts Policies 1 Dismiss act Changes o l t He1p Figure 3 54 Up to four network cards are automatically detected during the system installation This means the settings for net device and kernel module are correct if the cards have been present during installation If a card is inserted afterwards also these settings have to be adopted The drivers Setting Kernel module for the different net work cards are driver network card eepro100 Ethernetcard 100 Mbps PCI e100 Ethernetcard 100 Mbps PCI e1000 Ethernetcard 1000 Mbps PCI e1000 onboard LAN adapter AGS 3328 2 and higher e1000 onboard LAN adapter AGS 3390 2 bcm4400 onboard LAN adapter AGS 3328 1 and lower bcm5700 onboard LAN adapter AGS 3389 redundancy no possible possible no possible no no For the configuration of a redundant network please refer to section 6 1 7 Redundant network adapter Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 Getting started The section Adaptor 1 treats the network options of the LAN connection of TRANSForM A You can change them by selecting and editing them If you are putt
164. g up 3 3 1 Connecting Mouse and keyboard must be connected to the respective sockets on the rear of the Processor respectively the central Processor Please refer to sections 3 2 2 Mouse and 3 2 3 Keyboard e in an OmniBus configuration connect the link interface and remote power on off cables to the TRANSFORM A devices If an external genlock signal is used connect it also to the Processor Please refer to 3 2 16 OmniBus and 3 2 15 CPU board e Ina Processor configuration if necessary connect the EXTENDERS to the Processor Please refer to 3 2 17 Extender You have to provide the appropriate power supply Plug in the power cables on the back panel of the TRANSFORM A devices Please refer to section 3 2 1 Power supply Connect the graphic cards to the OMNISCALERS if OMNISCALERS are used Connect the display devices to the graphic cards or OMNISCALERS At least one display must be connected for administrating TRANSForM A Please refer to 3 2 5 Graphic cards and 3 2 6 OmniScaler Connect the video and RGB sources to the video input cards of TRANSFORM A Please refer to section 3 2 7 Quad Analog Video Card 3 2 8 Streaming Video Card 3 2 9 Quad SDI Video Card 3 2 10 Dual DVI Input Card and 3 2 11 Dual RGB Input Card Connect the Processor to the local area network by connecting the network to the network card or the network onboard adapter Please refer to section 3 2 13 Network For configuring a distributed system the central devi
165. he file nearby def cannot be found color allocation will be carried out using standard strategy that means using exact matching strategy The nearby configuration file contains in the first line the keyword COLORCELLS separated by a blank from the number of colors defined in the following lines e g COLORCELLS 135 In the following lines the RGB values are defined in hexadecimal notation separated by blanks and within a range of 0 to OxFF Lines beginning with the character are considered to be comments E g red FF 00 OO green GU EE lt 00 blue OO OO FF grey BF OZ In file mode all specified colors are allocated as shared color cells on start up of the X server By specifying a balanced set of colors you can avoid color distortions as they may appear in option mode if e g only shades of blue have been allocated and yellow is requested In the file nearby def a maximum of 256 colors can be specified If there is a need for private cells only a correspondingly smaller number of colors may be defined Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __ 6 19 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 10 BIOS settings for TransForm A Processor On a TRANSFORM A Processor the BIOS of the mainboard must have some settings different to the default BIOS settings to achieve a system that optimally supports the TRANsForm A hard and software The BIOS settings pend
166. he frame for the SATA standard hard disk drive and the solid state drive The frame of the SATA hard disk or solid state drive for AGS 3389 or AGS 3390 has on its left side of the front a lock which prevents from un mounting the hard disk unintentionally While turning the lock it is easily possible to un mount the hard disk Therefore only turn the lock if the Processor is switched off Figure 3 2 SATA hard disk Each SATA RAID 5 hard disk provides three LEDs at the front of the removable frame If the red LED lightens per manently this indicates that this particular hard disk has failed and should be replaced The extensive documentation of the LED codes can be found on the documentation CD of the RAID system Please note for the SATA RAID 5 systems A hard disk is already switched off by turning the frame lock key Never remove more than one hard disk while the system is running Never remove any hard disk while the system is in rebuilt mode or switched off Otherwise the system will crash and it can not be restored Never change the sequential order of the hard disks Otherwise the complete data on the drives will get corrupt and it can not be restored Figure 3 3 SATA RAID 5 hard disk drives Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __ __1___1__1__1___ 3 3 3 Getting started The SATA RAID 1 hard disk drive system looks similar but has instead of the ha
167. highlighted preset by current setting Delete all listed presets Reload preset file and discard changes Add all highlighted presets to list of presets Clear selection Dismiss dialog box Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Figure 4 11 4 Operating If the applied signal changes while adjusting the settings then a warning message apears please see below You Nev RGB input Timings detected Do you want switch back to RGB Control Panel can change to the contol tab and select an appropriate timing for the new signal no click YES a SS It is also possible that the system detects a new timing if the settings have been displaced too much In this case click NO and readjust the settings again Configuration of RGB input The video client is pre configured for displaying most common VESA timings Since most monitor signals differ Slightly from the VESA timings the user can adjust the pre configured modes to the provided monitor signals Also additional timings can be entered and stored as new presets For configuring the Duar RGB Input Caro it is useful to have a suitable test pattern basically thin black and white vertical lines Windows 95 98 NT Switch desktop pattern to alternating one pixel wide black and white vertical Macintosh lines PowerMacintosh Sun Workstation In console window emdtool enter xsetroot mod 4 4 enter xsetroot mod 4 4 for remo
168. his symbol marks passages concerning solely the distributed system The sheet icon indicates additional notes Next to this icon you find further information This arrow marks tips Next to this icon you find important notes Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11 1 3 1 Introduction 1 3 Safety instructions This section describes safety precautions which must be observed when installing and operating a product from Barco 1 3 1 Standards Safety regulations TRANSFORM A is built in accordance with the requirements of the international safety standard IEC 60950 1 UL 60950 1 and CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 03 which are the safety standards of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment These safety standards impose important requirements on the use of safety critical components materials and isolation in order to protect the user or operator against the risk of electric shock and energy hazard and having access to live parts Safety standards also impose requirements to the internal and external temperature variations radiation levels mechanical stability and strength enclosure construction and protection against risk of fire Simulated single fault condition testing ensures the safety of the equipment to the user even when the equip ment s normal operation fails Electromagnetic interference Electromagnetic emission of TRANSFoRM A compli
169. ideo in YUV4 2 2 PseudoColor 8 bit and TrueColor 16 bit overlay D DirectColor 16 bit Video in YUV4 2 2 TrueColor 16 bit Video in YUV4 2 2 multi color depth Video in YUV4 2 2 TrueColor 16 bit and PseudoColor 8 bit overlay DirectColor 32 bit Video in YUV4 2 2 TrueColor 32 bit Video in YUV4 2 2 1 Only applicable if UGX GRAPHIC CaRDs are used STREAMING VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp RGB format with 16 bpp or RGB format with 24 bpp X clients color mode of X server color mode of X server or 16 bit TrueColor color mode of X server color mode of X server color mode of X server or 8 bit PseudoColor color mode of X server color mode of X server Table 4 1 color capabilities for X server and video of TRANSFORM A 2 Depending on X server start option only with DuaL DVI INPUT CARD and DUAL RGB INPUT CARD 3 Valid for STREAMING VIDEO CARD configured for any compression algorithm except scn_dec 4 Valid for STREAMING VIDEO CARD configured for compression algorithm scn_dec 5 Valid for Duar DVI INPUT CARD with sources of type 1 2 6 Valid for Duar DVI INPUT
170. il selects the video card ERA 1 selects the video adapter on the card EAS Ore rene ale he 3 0 percentage of cut off for overscan Te E o E Live selects display mode Table 4 20 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ _ 4 38 4 Operating Options concerning Streaming Video Card option mpgPresetName mpgpn mpgPreset mpgpr mpgRefreshRate mpgrr mpgContrast mpgco mpgBrightness mpgbr mpgSaturation mpgsa mpgBoardNumber mpgbn mpgBoardChannelNumber mpgbc mpgDirtyEdges mpgde mpgP layMode mpgpm argument default meaning filename imparai selects a streaming video preset by specifying the presets name Tean selects a streaming video preset by specifying the number that represents its order in the alphabetic list of all streaming video presets Options concerning Quad SDI Video Card option qsdiRefreshRate qsdirr qsdiContrast qsdico qsdiBrightness qsdibr qsdiSaturation qsdisa qsdiBoardNumber qsdibn qsdiBoardChannelNumber qsdibc qsdiDirtyEdges qsdide qsdiPlayMode qsdipm Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 i ae i selects full 2 or half 1 refresh rate om IO ORS determines the start value of contrast OTEO EAO OE determines the start value of brightness U0 LEAS US determines
171. ilities to halt or to restart the X server or to shut down or to reboot TRANSFORM A e OverView The cubes of an OverView display wall OvERVIEW ML OVERVIEW MD OvERVIEW MP ATLAS67C4 PSI can be scanned and switched e Switch The HERMES V2A HERMES VXA HERMES D2D and Hermes DXD can be scanned and switched If available the video controller can be operated Enabling Disabling the daemon The REmMoTE CONTROL daemon is by default disabled but can be enabled entering the following command in a shell chkconfig mmtrctrl on After a reboot the daemon is started as written below To disable the daemon again use the command chkconfig mmtrctrl off Starting the daemon The REMOTE CONTROL daemon is started automatically on system start with the script sbanmy init 0 7 re d SIU6rer id Following options are available Option argument default meaning a auto configuration active Deactivates auto configuration of the REmoTE ConTROL chain i e the automatic addressing of all connected devices having no address assigned r reconfiguration active Deactivates automatic reconfiguration i e the reconfiguration of the REMOTE CONTROL chain on start up of the daemon p POTE Ie Sees Specifies the port of the daemon Default should not be changed al lt msec gt 200 Specifies delay time in milliseconds for sending messages OvERVIEW ML d lt msec gt 20 Specifies delay time in milliseconds for sending messages OveRVIEW MD O
172. implemented If an X client requests a shared color and the X server is not able to allocate this color exactly it decides to return a color that is nearby the re quested one Nearby Color Allocation can be applied optional whether by a command line parameter on start up of the X server option mode or by specifying a file with a set of predefined colors file mode Option mode Nearby Color Allocation is used if the color table is full or if there are more than a given number of colors con tained in the color table The number of colors in the color table up to that colors are allocated by exact match strategy is set by the following command line parameter nealpy lt A gt If the color table already contains lt n gt colors further allocation of shared colors will be carried out using Nearby Color Allocation strategy Values between 16 and 256 are allowed A certain amount of colors can be reserved as private colors for X clients that are to be started later File mode The environment variable NEARBY_FILE specifies the name of a file that contains the definition of shared col ors The environment variable NEARBY_FILE is only considered if the command line parameter nearby is not set The number of entries in the file specifies the parameter lt n gt in that case If neither nearby lt n gt nor NEARBY_FILE is set the X server searches for the file named nearby in the following directory etc MMTconfig nearby def If t
173. in assignment For complete cabling details please refer to the IEEE802 3 specification section 8 4 Coaxial Cables and Electrical Parameters TX TX RX Aa WN CON AO U RX Figure 7 13 RJ 45 connector pin assignments Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 7 16 7 Technical appendix Connection cable keyboard extension 14 25 Plug 1 twisted pairs Plug 2 1 1 and 14 1 2 2 and 15 2 3 3 and 16 3 etc 13 13 etc 23 23 and 10 23 24 24 and 11 24 25 25 and 12 25 Shield connected Shield connected to plug housing to plug housing Ferrit Ferrit Figure 7 14 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 17 7 Technical appendix 7 3 Order codes Documentation DOC 3265 2 user s manual TRANSForRM A X Terminal English OVT 2686 7 CD ROM medium TRANsForm A documentation amp supplement for X Terminal R5976144 user s Manual Osiris Hardware AGS 3328 2 Processor Pentium IV 3 4 GHz 19 In 6 PCI slots standard AGS 3328 3 Processor Pentium IV 3 4 GHz 19 In 6 PCI slots with redundant power supply AGS 3389 0 Processor Pentium IV 3 6 GHz 19 In 4 PCI slots 3 PCle slots standard AGS 3389 1 Processor Pentium IV 3 6 GHz 19 In 4 PCI slots 3 PCle slots with redundant power supply AGS 3389 2 Processor Core 2 Duo 2 13 GHz 19 In 4 PCI slots 3 PCle slot
174. in the figure above The order in that the input cards are inserted into TRANSForM A is as follows e inan OmniBus configuration the input cards are plugged into the PCI slots of the OmniBus devices please refer to section 3 2 16 OmniBus e Ina Processor configuration the input cards are inserted into the PCI slots following the OMNISCALERS If more than one input card is built in they are numbered in the sequence of the PCI slots please refer to sec tion 3 2 17 Extender Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the QUAD ANALOG VIDEO Caro please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1__1 _W 1__1__ 3 2 3 Getting started 3 2 8 Streaming Video Card The STREAMING VIDEO CARD provides the capability of displaying compressed encoded digital video streams The digital signal is decoded for further processing in TRANSForM A Up to four video streams can be processed simul taneously The STREAMING VIDEO CARD allows a redundant connection to the Ethernet The card exists in two differ ent versions STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 and STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 2 Standard The STREAMING VIDEO CARD supports the following stream types over Ethernet type supported stream types STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 MPEG 2 MPEG 4 MJPEG MxPEG 2D Wavelet and TRANSForRM SCN streams STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 2 MPEG 2 MPEG 4 and visiowave streams Tab
175. indicated in the following form lt x gt lt y gt Here lt x gt and lt y gt give the horizontal and vertical position within the display wall starting with the upper left module as 0 0 0 0 4 0 4x2 4x2 Figure3 57 For each rendering machine a unique IP address within the specified sub net must be provided In addition the Ethernet addresses of the rendering machines network cards must be entered The Ethernet address is printed on a label on the network card For example EA 00 60 97 78 29 0a As well the Ethernet address of a rendering engine can be read from its output on the corresponding display during the boot process Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ 3 61 3 Getting started Rendering Engines Configuration Enter number of Rendering engines 2 2 IP address for engine 1 192 168 149 1 192 168 60 1 Ethernet address for engine 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 08 a6 a9 58 Screen arrangement for engine 1 Width x Height 2x4 4x2 Display Ss Position for engine 1 X Y 0 0 0 0 IP address for engine 2 192 168 149 2 192 168 60 2 Ethernet address for engine 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 08 a6 a9 73 Screen arrangement for engine 2 Width x Height 2x4 4x2 Display s Position for engine 2 X Y 0 0 4 0 Next there is the choice to enable Wake On LAN for the network adapters of the rendering m
176. ing TRANSForM A into operation you have to change the pre adjusted IP address to your own Host name and IP devices You are allowed to control the parameters which are specific to this host and related to its main connection to the local IP network Host name eos noo X Enabled Co Manual Dhep Bootp eos Host name domain Config mode Primary name domain Aliases opt IP address Netmask opt Net device Kernel module Iv70 port Copt Irg Copt accept e Feoi iaj aala E39 eII EII A eth8 e1888 eee cance He1p Figure 3 55 Take care to insert the same sub net IP address in the configuration for a distributed system as explained in section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system The section Adaptor 2 treats the network options of the subnet used with the distributed system T For the sub net network card of the central unit IP addresses must be specified Use the IP addresses 192 168 60 xxx as long as it will not collide with any other subnet within the Internet Select 192 168 60 254 for the central processor This enables the numbering of the rendering machines consequently with 1 2 3 etc Clarify the corresponding Netmask addresses with your network administrator In the field Primary name domain insert eos core a ee ele ie ieee ey eee ee ee ee ere SG Cee ae ear Vn Le eee ea eee el Cp eee ee re O ee nee A fdaptor 2 X
177. ing with 1024x1536 pixels The graphics card connects just to one of the projection modules this module displays only its part and loops through the unchanged signal to the sec ond projection module which displays the other part of the signal System requirements The following conditions have to be met to allow 1x2 XGA settings e The resolution of a projection module must be XGA 1024x786 pixels e The projection modules must support 1x2 XGA settings with an input signal of 1024x1536 pixels and loop through functionality e Only projection modules which are positioned on top of each other can form a couple and use one graphics channel commonly e The graphics cards in TRANSFoRM A have to be UGX GRAPHIC CARDS e Only display walls with an even number of rows can be used for 1x2 XGA settings e In general the upper projection module is connected to the output channel of TRANsForm A the lower projec tion module is connected to the loop through output of the upper projection module Setup When configuring the projection modules for 1x2 XGA settings their DDC information is changed from XGA 1024x768 pixels to Dual XGA 1024x1536 pixels Please refer to the corresponding user documentation of the projection module for 1x2 XGA setting According to the DDC information the UGX GraPHic CarD will adjust its timing automatically to Dual XGA The figure below illustrates the resulting default graphic channels and shows the default cabling for a
178. installation should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe opera tion of the equipment is not compromised The mounting of the equipment should be such that no hazardous condition is achieved due to uneven mechanical loading Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____ 1 6 1 Introduction 1 3 5 Servicing Mechanical or electrical modifications others than described in this manual must not be made to the devices Barco is not liable for damages resulting from modified devices Only authorized personnel should carry out other maintenance work not explicitly mentioned in this installation manual Never open the case of TransForm A without first disconnecting all power supply cords Measurements and tests with the opened device may be carried out only in the factory or by specially trained personnel due to the dangers of electrical shock 1 3 6 Cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners See sec tion 5 2 Cleaning for a cleaning instruction 1 3 7 Re packing Keep the original shipping carton and packing material they will come in handy if you ever have to ship your unit For maximum protection repack your set as it was originally packed at the factory Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1__1 1 7 1
179. is per formed in the OMNISCALER therefore data is transferred 1 1 and the original resolution must be inserted into the formula If the source is displayed smaller than 1 1 the source is downscaled directly in the input card The original size of the different video types can be read from the table above e fr frame rate For video a frame rate of 25fps PAL SECAM and 30fps NTSC is standard For dynamic RGB input a frame rate of 20 fps in normal cases gives an acceptable performance If the RGB source is mostly static even lower frame rates can be selected e cd color depth For all video windows the color mode YUV 4 2 2 is used which means the factor is cd 2 For RGB windows two different color modes may be useful please refer to section 4 2 2 Color capabilities Color mode RGB 16 bpp cd 2 Color mode RGB 24 bpp cd 3 With the average bandwidth of the OmniBus A12 of 200 MBps per input card the sum of the bandwidth demands of the windows provided by one input card should not be bigger than this value Anyhow also higher bandwidth usage may be possible but the overall configuration should be considered In case of doubt contact the Barco support please refer to section 8 3 Hot line 200 MBps B B B With the effective bandwidth of the OmniBus A18 of 400 MBps the sum of the bandwidth of the individual win dows may not be bigger than 400 MBps to provide optimal performance 400 MBps B B B In a Processor
180. ision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLY 3 14 3 Getting started 3 2 Cabling 3 2 1 Power supply Check the power rating on your outlet before connecting the devices of TRANSForm A to the wall outlet or to a power strip Contact your facilities manager or a qualified electrician if you are not sure what type of power is supplied to your building TRANSFORM A is designed to operate with single phase power systems having a grounded neutral conductor To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not plug into any other type of power system To connect Processor OMNIBUS devices or EXTENDERS to the power supply follow these steps e If using an OmniBus with redundant power supply first connect an equipotential bondig conductor to the connector 28 Figure 3 11 at an OmNniBus A18 and connector 26 Figure 3 8 at an OmniBus A12 respectively e Plug the female end of the power cords into the mains connections of each Processor 25 Figure 3 5 OmniBus A12 24 OMNIBUS A18 27 and EXTENDER 24 Figure 3 14 respectively Figure 3 16 Mains connection e Plug the male end of each power cord into a power outlet 3 2 2 Mouse The standard mouse is a USB optical mouse with a PS 2 adapter Either plug it with its PS 2 adapter into the PS 2 mouse jack 26 or plug USB connector into one of the USB plugs 28 of the Processor aa Figure 3 17 mouse connection via PS 2 left and via USB right 3 2 3 Keyboard The
181. ists of two or more network adapters of the same type At least one of the adapters must be a server adapter The other ones can be server or desktop adapters Nevertheless we recommend to use for a redundant network adapter exclusively server adapters to achieve an easy spare part handling A team has an active primary adapter and one or more secondary adapters The primary adapter is the network adapter that is used by default for data transfer One of the secondary adapters is only used if a fault occurs that prevents data transfer via the primary adapter Whether the primary adapter is a server adapter or not is of no importance but all adapters of a team must be either ex clusive 100 Mbps network cards or exclusive 1000 Mbps network cards or onboard LAN adapters of AGS 3390 2 Configuration of an AFT team To form a team of network adapters the script config can be used Therefore log in as root and change to the directory opt MMT2686 ians The factory set password for root is barco eos login root Password barco root eos root cd opt MMT2686 ians Start the script by entering config root eos config config The script will prompt you to select the network adapters that are part of the team The network adapters are named ethO eth1 etc This numbering follows the reverse order of the PCI slots in which the cards are in serted please refer also to section 3 2 13 Network Nevertheless it might be more convenient to first ch
182. l DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 129 34 39 113 40 39 39 39 50 41 42 31 47 36 17 49 49 49 49 49 148 H_POS 200 216 184 240 216 232 296 280 272 304 282 287 384 297 311 278 327 324 328 327 408 424 329 386 384 360 326 392 384 391 359 496 496 496 496 496 479 7 Technical appendix H POL SRS Sem Jeg a YE a ae YR ek ee e a e eS N SS a ge S a a S NSS a S ah ee S ce S eae eS V_POL LE ON Se 7 as JY a Fg ae a a a SS OIRO I ak Re A a ORS eG we nage A cee Fe a a Sa ROCO RORO a a a I ata eam ee Nag ON em BP cE Sy IP o gt ee SYNC_MODE Pale ee emai rae ee ADC_PHASE 22 26 7 8 1792x1344 60Hz 1792x1344 75Hz 1792x1344 85Hz 1800x1440 60Hz 1800x1440 70Hz 1800x1440 75Hz 1856x1392 60Hz 1856x1392 72Hz 1856x1392 75Hz 1920x1080 60Hz 1920x1080 75Hz 1920x1200 60Hz 1920x1200 75Hz 1920x1200 85Hz 1920x1440 60Hz 1920x1440 75Hz 2048x1536 45Hz 2048x1536 60HZ 2048x1536 66HZ 2048x2048 45HZ coe m m m m mm mm mMm mMm I mMM I mMM I ee ee ee Ml M ee PLL_DIVIDER N J J OO 2456 2464 2456 2472 2472 2528 2544 2560 2576 2608 2592 2624 2640 2600 2640 2804 2800 2816 2804 H_SIZE 1792 1792 1792 1800 1800 1800 1856 1856 1856 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 2048 2048 2048 2048 V_TOT 1394 1417 1411 1490 1499 1503 1439 1450 1500 1118 1128 1242 1253 1260 1500 1500 1600
183. le The cover of the power module is been used as heat sink for cooling usually the temperature is around 50 60 Celsius under full condition When exchanging a power module during operation of the OmniBus A12 the two other power modules have to be in operation e Locate the defective power module by examining the Ds 25 on the individual power modules please see above e Unplug the power cord from the mains connection 24 of the concerned power module e Push the unlock handle bar 27 to the right unless the power module is released keep it at the right and remove the defective power module by pulling at the Aand le 28 e Take anew power module and insert it into the system Take care to insert it in the same orientation like the other modules with the mains connection 24 on the left side e Make sure that the un ock handle bar 27 engages e Re plug the power cord into the mains connection 24 e Check that the Z D 25 lightens up green e Check that the red LED standby component failed 6 at the front of the OmniBus A12 stops to shine Please note As soon as the defective power module is removed and the remaining two power modules are working well this LED will also stop to shine It only indicates if a defective component is in the device Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 53 5 Maintenance 5 2 Cleaning Use a soft cloth to periodically clean
184. le 3 2 Supported stream types of STREAMING VIDEO CARD Connectors The STREAMING VIDEO CARD provides two RJ45 connectors to establish the connection to the network For a redun dant connection a network cable should be plugged into each of the plugs 1 and 2 These network cables should connect on the other side to a redundant network In case of a failure of one connection the other con nection will take over the complete network traffic If a redundant connection is not required either plug 1 or plug 2 can be used for the connection Both plugs use the same IP and MAC address so no configuration in regard of the used plug is required oo 8 7 nE la 1 ia 1 1 B 1 E 2a 5 2a J 2 E E 2 5 0000 6 7 8 1 RJ45 Network connector 1 video network 10 100Mbps on SVC 1 100 1000Mbps on SVC 2 2 RJ45 Network connector 2 video network 10 100Mbps on SVC 1 100 1000Mbps on SVC 2 a green LED ON connected to the Ethernet b green LED ON connected with 100 Mbps SVC 1 1000 Mbps SVC 2 OFF connected with 10 Mbps SVC 1 100 Mbps SVC 2 5 stream 1 is active 6 stream 2 Is active 7 stream 3 is active 8 stream 4 is active Figure 3 29 connectors of the STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 left and SVC 2 right Order For the order in that the input cards are inserted into TRANSForm A please see section 3 2 7 Quad Analog Video Card Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008
185. lease refer to the fvwm2 man pages Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Move window Resize window Iconify window Maximize window respective return to normal Stick window to its position on a virtual desktop Refresh window Raise window Lower window Next window Previous window Display window list Close window Kill window Restart window manager Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Please refer to the fvwm2 man pages Display release integrity status please refer also to section 4 8 6 Release integrity utility eosinfo Start event monitor Start vi text editor Start telnet client Display analog clock Display digital clock Start bash shell Start big bash shell Start login bash shell Start tcsh shell Start big tcsh shell Start login tcsh shell Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 Operating 4 6 Displaying video and RGB signals Video and RGB signals can be displayed on an Barco display wall with the optional input cards QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD and DUAL RGB INPUT CARD Based on an extension library of the X server the Barco video client xvideo allows the convenient handling of analog video streaming video and RGB signa
186. lists the video channels according to the order of the input cards in the sys tem When configuring logical video channels these logical video channels are listed as first channels in the con trol panel for that type of video The video channels that are used to set up a logical video channel cannot be addressed separately any longer Therefore the absolute amount of selectable video channels decreases Any how the control panel shows the maximum amount of video channels per input card but the cards as mentioned in the control panel do not refer to the physical cards in the system Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 6 12 6 Advanced configuration channels This section starts with the keyword channels and defines the assignment of graphic channels to projection channels This section must not be changed manually but by aid of the script EOSconfig channel reordering see section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration If this section is not existing the standard assignment as described in section 3 2 5 Graphic cards is effective The graphic channel physical channel is defined by the order of the graphic card and the port number The number of the projection channel indicates the place where the data has to be displayed logical channel Usu ally graphic channels and projection channels have the same numbering see section 3 2 5 Graphic cards please Anyhow depending on the configuration it
187. llation script This section describes the additional part for configuring a distributed system On the one hand the additional sections in the configuration of a distributed system contain the specification of the sub net and on the other hand the successive parameterization of every individual rendering machine Sub net Indicate the transmission rate of the sub net network card and the desired interface type The IP address of the sub net network card of the central device must be specified identical to the IP address specified with linuxconf See section 3 4 1 System configuration You have to insert the sub net specification according to the specifications explained in section 3 4 1 System configuration Changes have to be made in a consistent way in both places Configuring the Distributed X Server Enter IP Address for the Subnet 192 168 149 254 192 168 60 0 Enter Subnet Netmask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Rendering machines The parameterization of the rendering machines is carried out successively for every device For every rendering machine the arrangement of the Barco projection modules is indicated in the following form lt W gt x lt h gt Here lt w gt and lt h gt give the number of columns and rows For example 4x2 4 monitors next to each other 2 monitors on top of each other For every rendering machine the position of the projection modules this is the position of the upper left mod ule is
188. lots of the Processor or the EXTENDER If more than one OMNISCALER is built in they are numbered in the sequence of the PCI slots please refer to section 3 2 17 Extender Graphic Omni Omni Board Scaler Scaler PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 Figure 3 27 Example for connecting OMNISCALERS with the graphic card in a PROCESSOR AGS 3389 Specifications For detailed technical specifications of the OMNISCALER please refer to section 7 1 Technical data Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ __1__1__W1__1__1__1_H 3 21 3 Getting started 3 2 7 Quad Analog Video Card The QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD provides the capability of displaying video signals like VCR TV CCTV etc The analog video signals are digitized for further processing in TRANSForM A Four video signals can be processed simultane ously Standard The video standard Composite Video VHS FBAS CVBS CVS Y is supported Connectors The QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD provides four BNC connectors for video insertion Figure 3 28 connectors of QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD video channel 1 video channel 2 video channel 3 video channel 4 green LED channel 1 green LED channel 2 green LED channel 3 green LED channel 4 RJ45 GPIO connector reserved O Oonr au hb WN Table 3 1 channels of the QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD Order Within a single QUAD ANALOG VIDEO Caro the numbering of the video channels is as shown
189. ls Simultaneous operation Multiple input cards can be operated simultaneously In this case the corresponding video windows may freely overlap For larger display walls a system with multiple OmniBus devices may be required Large systems with freely movable video and RGB windows require the usage of a distributed system OmniScaler Due to the dual color mode capability of the OMNISCALER TRANSFORM A can display video and RGB signals in their native color mode e g YUV4 2 2 and 16 bit RGB TrueColor while the X Server operates in 8 bit PseudoColor mode with 256 colors Please refer to section 4 2 Color management for more details One OMNISCALER provides the capability to process up to 128 video and RGB inputs simultaneously Video and RGB data is triple buffered Therefore only entire frames are displayed in sync with the graphical data to avoid frame tearing Backend scaling The OMNISCALER is able to do backend scaling Scaling the video data at the backend of data transfer chain Input card gt PCI Bus gt OMNISCALER has its big advantage in a reduced need of PCI Bus bandwidth Furthermore the OMNISCALER provides up scaling capabilities until full screen resolution and far beyond The backend scaling uses linear interpolation for calculating new pixels In standard configuration the X server depending on the size of the video window and the type of the input card automatically controls the usage of backend scaling Dependant o
190. m with multiple logical screens partition still contains the backup of the working partition containing the state from before the upgrade If you are sure that you want to keep the new release it is recommended to make a new backup of the system please refer to section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility Q If you operate TransForm A in eXtended safety boot mode after the upgrade the backup From release 3 4 on the default assignment of video channels in a distributed system has changed To maintain the former video assignment the option new_video_layout must be removed from the X server parameters file mmTServerConfig each time after the X 11 configuration before restarting the X server please see section 6 1 5 X server parameters Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ __ __1 ____1__1____1__1 6 7 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 4 Custom configuration If you select Custom Configuration when starting the system configuration script you run through an ab breviated configuration The extent of the configuration can be customized i e you can decide for each parame ter whether it is called up by the configuration script or not Configuration The default configuration for custom configuration is stored in a text file etc MMTconfig MMTProfile Each line contains a single keyword and its status e g ASK_PRIMARY_HOSTNAME 1 Status 1 stands fo
191. mbinations if considering pixel clock and line frequency requirements 2 x 30Hz at 16 bpp 2 x 20Hz at 24 bpp 2 x 30Hz at 16 bpp 2 x 20Hz at 24 bpp 2 x 37Hz at 16 bpp 2 x 25Hz at 24 bpp PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 2 3 3 V 0 3 V 12 V 10 5V 1 5 A 3 3 V 1 6 A 12 V 100 mA 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm 4259 1 x 64 bit 3 3 5 V PCI edge connector 2 x 15 pin SubMinD HD connector VGA compatible Table 7 12 Presets of Dual RGB Input Card and Dual DVI Input Card Default Presets file opt MMT2686 etc xvideo presets prs Presets with PRESET_TYPE 2 identifies its use for the DUAL RGB INPUT Caro and with PREST_TYPE 3 its use for the Duar DVI INPUT CARD The FRAME_REDUCTION has for each preset with PRESET_TYPE 2 the value 6 and for each preset with PRESET_TYPE 3 the value 128 The H_POS value contains Hor Sync Time H Back Porc H Left Border 640x350 70HZ 640x350 85Hz 640x400 70HZ 640x400 85HZ 640x480 60HZ 640x480 72Hz 640x480 75Hz 640x480 85HZ 720x400 70HZ TF D Lu O WY z lt oa O Ni a O O O O o al me WY Ta a aA a a aA Z VU mr gt OQ ae ale gt gt gt gt ale mm gt VY lt 800 640 449 350 14285 60 137 1 1 16 832 640 445 350 11764 63 160 0 1 16 800 640 450 400 14285 35 137 1 1 16 832 640 445 400 11764 44 160 1 0 16 800 640 525 480 16666 35 144 1 1 24 83
192. metry argument default meaning Ce Ome racy see option moduleVideo above g omeri see option moduleGeometry above Table 4 29 Resources of the XVideo class concerning the Quad Analog Video Card qav qav qav qav qav qav qav qav qav qav qav qav Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 recording RefreshRate contrast brightness saturation boardMenu boardNumber boardChannelMenul boardChannelMenu64 boardChannelNumber dirtyEdges playMode SETAN VHS see option qavRecording above IOUS iL see option qavRefreshRate above double CxS see option qavContrast above double OMe see option qavBrightness above double UPES see option qavSaturation above SEAE OAO ROAN C ETOAC e Ea Sets the names of the video card appearing in the video cards menu 64 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first video card and so on IE ANE all see option qavBoardNumber above Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Sets the names of the adapters of the first video card appearing in the channel menu 4 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on SG ie al ipo Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Sets the names of the adapters of the 64 video card appearing in the channel menu 4 names each 12 characte
193. might be useful to reorder the graphic channels and to connect the projection modules with the respective ports of the graphic cards The following example should point up the operating Two OmniBus devices are used to display graphic and video on a 4x3 display wall Thereby some videos shall be movable on the left part of the wall others on the right part of the wall Each OmniBus is equipped with graphic cards OMNISCALERS and input cards With the standard ordering the first six modules would be controlled by the first OmniBus counted line by line starting in the upper left corner OMNI Bus 2 would control the remaining six modules in the lower part of the wall The video windows could only be displayed in one of these areas The figure below shows the standard ordering The graphic channels of OmNI Bus 1 are illustrated bright graphic channels of OmniBus 2 are illustrated dark PROCESSOR gr ch 1 gr ch 2 gr ch 3 gr ch 4 gr ch 5 pr ch 1 pr ch 2 pr ch 3 pr ch 4 pr ch 5 OmNIBus 1 1 2 AG lll And with a possible new numbering of the graphic channels enabling to split the display wall in a left and a right side as indicated in the figure and table below gr ch 6 gr ch 7 gr ch 8 gr ch 9 gr ch 10 pr ch 6 pr ch 7 pr ch 8 pr ch 9 pr ch 10 gr ch 11 Gem 2 Te g gr ch 14 gr ch 15 pr ch 11 pr ch 12 pr ch 13 pr ch 14 pr ch 15 GEC 1
194. n Sada Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Sets the names of the adapters of the 64 video card appearing in the channel menu 4 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on ENE il see option qsdiBoardChannelNumber above double 0 see option qsdiDirtyEdges above Senakio Live see option qsdiPlayMode above Table 4 32 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 4 48 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo Class concerning the Dual DVI Input Card option ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi ddvi red green blue inputSignal dirtyEdge downLoadEdid upLoadEdid reduction noiseReduction deinterlaceMode preset boardMenu boardNumber boardChannelMenul boardChannelMenu128 boardChannelNumber playMode argument default meaning double OS see option ddviRed above double Oe see option ddviGreen above double OS see option ddviBlue above THAE 3 see option ddviInputSignal above double Syn OTI O see option ddviDirtyEdge above SEC see option ddviDownLoadEdid above SECUN see option ddviUpLoadEdid above E 128 see option ddviReduction above DNE 0 see option ddviNoiseReduction above abies 3 see option ddviDeinterlaceMode above IGNE J
195. n is controlled by pixel values serving as indices to a color map The application obtains the pixel values from the X window sys tem RGB values RGB values are the red green and blue intensity values that are used to define a color According to the X 11 protocol these values are represented as 16 bit unsigned numbers with 0 the minimum intensity and 65535 the maximum intensity Most hardware however represents each value as a number in the range from 0 to 255 Color map A color map consists of a set of numbered entries so called color cells defining pixel values Each color cell contains a single RGB triple a combination of RGB values The color map will be filled at runtime X 11 supports two ways for handling color maps e shared color cell Colors that can be used by different X clients are called shared colors A color that was once allocated can not be changed When an X client is requesting for a shared color the X server searches the color map for exactly the requested color exact match If the color is not found a new color will be allocated in the color map e private color cell A color that can only be used by one client is considered to be a private color Only the client that allocated it can use a private color A client is able to change the contents of a private cell As long as entries are avail able in the color map private colors can be allocated Color depth On a black and white screen each pixel is repr
196. n is needed to adjust TRANSForM A to your local conditions 3 4 1 System configuration The following section describes how to change or insert the network configuration keyboard properties user properties or passwords To change the configuration log in as root and start the configuration utility The factory set password for root is barco eos login root Password barco Enter Linuxconf eos root Linuxconft Navigate within the configuration window by using the Tab key and the arrow keys A in front of a folder sig nificates the folder is open a significates the folder is closed Select the folder by putting the focus on it Arrow up key and Arrow down key and confirming with the Enter key to change it s state An arrow after a word sig nalizes that there is a list hidden Open the list by putting the focus on the word and pressing lt Ctrl gt x Put the focus on a list item to select it and confirm There are also help files available Each window contains a Help button The Help button of the main window offers general help The Help buttons of the sub windows offer help concerning the content of the sub window Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLLLL _ 3 49 Network configuration 3 Getting started Select Config Networking Client Tasks Host name and IP network devices localhost localdomain Linuxconf 1 24 Csubrev 2 Profile O
197. n the scaling factor either the OMNISCALER or the input card scales data As soon as the size of the video or RGB window is larger than 1 1 the OmNniScALeR scales data up to the displayed size If the video is dis played in a lower resolution than 1 1 then the input card itself performs a downscaling to reduce the need of bandwidth for the data transfer Module video The QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD DUAL DVI INPUT CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD and the DUAL RGB INPUT CarD also display videos and RGB signals respectively without borders and fitted to complete projection modules 1 to nxn depending on configuration The display is always on top other applications are behind and can not be manipulated by accident If the display is removed from the desktop quit or iconified all covered applica tions show up again immediately In a distributed system the display wall is controlled by multiple rendering machines If a TE video shall be displayed on the display areas of multiple rendering machines all concerned rendering machines must be supplied with the video signal Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 12 4 Operating Plain video mode The plain video mode may be used in a system where only very few videos are displayed In such systems it is possible to omit the OMNISCALERS Video in plain video mode can not be upscaled and the color depth
198. n video mode Alternatively to the standard configuration where always OmNISCALER are used to display video or RGB input data this section describes a possibility to display video and RGB data in a system without OMNISCALERS This is further referred as plain video Plain video is only recommended for systems where few video or RGB windows shall be shown where those windows do not need to be upscaled System requirements For plain video mode the following system requirements have to be fulfilled Release X Server release 4 3 or higher Hardware UGX GRAPHIC CARD with QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARDS QUAD SDI VIDEO CARDS STREAMING VIDEO CARDS DuaL DVI INPUT CARDS and or DUAL RGB INPUT CARDS Depth resolution The visual class must be set to TrueColor One of the following settings can be config and Visual class ured 4 Or 16 boppe 64K colors 3 fOr 32 bpp 16M colors 4 for 8 and 16 bpp MultiDepth MultciCcolors Default yisual 5 for i6 anc bpo MultiDepth MulciColors Default visual Please refer to section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration subsection Depth resolution PseudoColor TrueColor Table 6 5 System requirements for plain video Bandwidth considerations Plain video is more restrictive towards bandwidth consumption Therefore you should first check the feasibility of a configuration Please check section 4 6 1 The input cards for the principal understanding of the calculation of bandwidth consumption The column bandwidth
199. nal signal should be unplugged before switching to an other type of genlock Genlock is available in an OmniBus configuration only The numbering of the cards does not consider special numbering as applied when using rendering engines or logical video channels All cards of one type are always simply counted one after the other If not using xgenlock in interactive mode the option e must be used to commit commands e g xgenlock e on Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 4 72 5 Maintenance 5 Maintenance The devices of TRANSForM A require very little maintenance Some maintenance operations are nevertheless nec essary to maintain distortion free operation of TRANSForM A and can be done by means of the following descrip tions WARNING Maintenance operations not explained in this section bear the risk of electric shock and of injury from hazardous moving parts If a maintenance operation is needed that is not mentioned in this chapter instruct authorized personnel with it Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 5 1 5 Maintenance 5 1 Exchange of consumables 5 1 1 Replacing the filter pad of Processor The filter pads of the Processor has to be changed in intervals depending on the grade of pollution of the air The air filter is located behind the ventilation slits 1 on the front of the Processo
200. ng system software on the hard drive Upgrade To upgrade the system software switch on TRANSForm A and insert the installation CD TransForm A system disc OVT 2686 1 TRANSForM A will boot from CD The Welcome Screen displays a selection of installation and upgrade options To upgrade TRANSForM A type upgrade and press the lt Enter gt key To instal press the lt ENTER gt key To install Fety type eosn lt ENTER gt To upgrade the E systen type upgrade lt ENTER gt boot Figure 6 8 Before the upgrade starts just the keyboard must be specified Select the type of the used keyboard with the arrow keys and confirm OK If you press Cancel a keyboard of us type becomes installed by default Configure Keyboard Hhat type of keyboard do you have Figure 6 9 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __ 6 6 6 Advanced configuration When the upgrade is finished you are prompted to press the lt Enter gt key to reboot TRANSFORM A Congratulations EOS upgrade is complete Press ENTER to reboot and then REMOVE the bootable EOS CD Figure 6 10 The system will reboot now Remove the CD from the drive as soon as the drawer ejects it After this system upgrade you have also to run through 3 4 2 X 11 configuration and if you have a distributed system through 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system or 3 4 4 Configuring a distributed syste
201. nlock The X Genlock extension enables to synchronize the graphic output to the frame rate of an internal or external video source or to the clock of one UGX or AGX GRAPHIC CARD The usage of X Genlock is explained in the following sections Q Genlock is available in an OmniBus configuration only Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 8 4 5 Window manager 4 Operating The window manager which is pre configured on TRANSForM A offers a convenient and fast way to choose certain commands By clicking on the root window background depending on left click or right click a menu opens Work menu Xterm Xvideo Rctrl XGenLock Select QAVC Quad Analog S Video Card Select SVC Streaming S Video Card Select QSDI Quad SDI S Video Card Select DDVI Dual DVI Input Card Select Intern Select Extern OFF ON Read Config File Save Config File Work menu XTerm xvideo System Tools Retr EOSinfo Soen any Event Test Configuration Vi telcos menu PoE Window Manager Clocks x Shells EXI Figure 4 1 Left click and right click on the root window background Start X terminal window Start Xvideo client for displaying video and RGB Start REMOTE CONTROL Client only applicable if the REmoTE CONTROL daemon is running please refer to section 4 7
202. nnel the video adapters for engine 1 1 1 2 0 Enter for each video channel the video adapters for engine 2 1 01 2 These are the Logical Video settings for the Distributed X Server engine_l 12 0 engine_2 0 1 2 Everything correct yes no yes y Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLL 3 63 3 Getting started Finishing the configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK K KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKK Distributed X Server setup done Have fun NOTE enter service mmtserv to start the Distributed X Server KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKK When configuration is completed you can enter service mmtserv to start the X server eos opt MMT2686 config service mmtserv If you operate TransForm A in eXtended safety boot mode please take care to update the backup partition after successful configuration see section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ 3 64 3 Getting started 3 4 4 Configuring a distributed system with multiple logical screens Configuring a distributed system with multiple logical screens is largely similar to Torm configuring a distributed system without multiple logical screens See section 3 4 2 X 11 configuration for the basic course
203. nput Only applicable for Hermes DXD and HERMES VXA In 1 for Out 2 In 2 for Out 2 Switch second output to first input color code according to LEDs Switch second output to second input color code according to LEDs HERMES V2A and Hermes VXA only Left Right Up Down Menu Select Send left command to analog controller Send right command to analog controller Send up command to analog controller Send down command to analog controller Send menu command to analog controller Send enter command to analog controller Send plus command to analog controller Send minus command to analog controller Figure 4 15 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 61 Options 4 Operating The rctri client accepts the following options on the command line The options are listed together with their respective arguments and default values and a short description of their meaning option name ep hay G EONS Ty argument default meaning string none Changes application name and allows to specify a certain resource file String SDISPLAY Specifies remote host geometry POOE IL ONG Specifies position and size of the rctr1 control panel lt hostname gt Local hese Specifies hostname or IP address where the rct rl daemon is started JOO IC 6 hoods Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed Carel O Activates or de
204. o TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 3 17 3 Getting started Depending on the configuration the card is delivered with different adapter cables e Dual DVI to 2xDVI D adapter cable Digital output for display on projection modules with digital input a Figure 3 21 Dual DVI to 2xDVI D adapter cable e Dual DVI to 2xCRT adapter cable Analog output for display on projection modules with analog input Figure 3 22 Dual DVI to 2xCRT adapter cable Order The first graphic card in respect to PCI slot numbering identifies itself as primary graphic adapter by lighting the green LED of the respective graphic channel when TrANSForm A is switched on The primary graphic adapter is the channel where the system emits diagnostic and status messages during system startup e in an OmniBus configuration the graphic cards are plugged into the OmniBus devices For the explicit order of the graphic cards please refer to the sections 3 2 16 OmniBus e Ina Processor configuration graphic cards are in most cases plugged in the Processor If multiple graphic cards are used the other graphic cards should be inserted in sequence to the primary graphic adapter into the PCI slots and are numbered consequently following their numbering Please refer also to section 3 2 17 Extender Each UGX GraPHic CARD provides four ports for connecting projection cubes monitors or projectors The uppe
205. o restart the X server in multi color depth if an other color mode has Q been configured in the X 11 configuration But if the X server has been configured in multi color depth it can be restarted with the other color depths mentioned above To revert to multi color depth the X server must be restarted without option in the default setting Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 4 66 4 Operating 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility If TRANSForM A is Operated in eXtended safety boot mode see section 6 1 1 Boot modes a backup of the complete working partition including the TRANsForm A system installation the X 11 configuration and any additional con figuration can be made Besides the main intention of eliminating the risk of a corrupted file system new con figurations can first be checked and undone if derived Check backup procedure To check if a fully functional system backup is stored on the backup partition enter service eosxs with the option check into the command line service eosxs check With an operable backup the system will respond eosxs check OK check passed Backup information Date and time when the backup was made gets returned by means of the info option Therefore enter the following expression into the command line service eosxs info Thereupon date and time of the backup is displayed Backup procedure The f
206. ock keyboard switch ssensnsessssensesnesesessesesnesess 3 3 logical video Channel s ccccceecceeeseeteeseeseeees 6 12 GV OIG sioriecsstastcecau cacnanatacaueteneeedatncmacareoratacek 6 9 loose Dinding i t ehar oudoatcetehaeetde Ganadeelsedenaudaacntets 4 43 MAINS CONNECTION cee eeeseeceeseeeseteeessseeesseeeennees 3 6 MAINTENANCE ccc cccceceeeseeesesteeeessseeeeeeees 4 10 5 1 managing the Presets ccsesecsseseseeseeteeeeeeees 4 36 DELEA Ul Al VE EERE E sande E AA A IA TT 1 8 manual pages X Server s ssssssssssesessssessssesesseses 6 9 manual pages XAM ce ceceseeseeseesseseesseseeteeteeeeeeees 4 7 MMITCONFIGSECHIONS c cee eeeseeeeeeeseeteeteeteeeenees 6 10 MMTP TOT CS cctos deciusseinanasntes a TEA 6 8 MMTSErVer CON Gaz setts ucts els ccettariens Gora tiie tans ct ce 6 9 models of network Cards ccecceeeseesseeeeseeees 3 30 Module RGC uaa Rostock oaeseae ts iaseae Danks 4 19 module video woe eee eeeeceesseesseeeeees 4 6 4 12 4 19 monitor Remote Control client 4 53 4 54 monitor resolution configuration cccee 3 55 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt 9 PMO MOUUIME SVS COIN en 2 3 MOUSE aena an 333 53 16 CUSTOM CONFIQUIATION ee eeeteeteeteeteeteeeees 4 10 device configuration eee eeeeeeteeteeteeteeteenees 3 54 PS2 IENA OE natin teeta aaa 7 15 several MOUSE pointers ccecc
207. odified in the server if the new values are higher than the old ones The Processor is only reset if all connections between clients and server are broken If several clients send control packets then one missing connection does not lead to a reset of the Processor Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ 6 28 7 Technical appendix 7 Technical appendix This chapter provides tabular overviews about the technical details of TRANSFoRM A its components and of their interfaces Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1_ 7 1 7 1 Technical data Processor dimensions h w d dimensions h w d with rubber feet fixation handling weight with standard power supply weigth with redundant power supply power mains power consumption standard power supply redundant power supply operating conditions OmniBus A12 dimensions h w d dimensions h w d with rubber feet fixation handling weight power mains power consumption operating conditions OmniBusA18 dimensions h w d dimensions h w d with rubber feet fixation handling weight with standard power supply weigth with redundant power supply power mains power consumption operating conditions Extender dimensions h w d dimensions h w d with rubber feet fixation handling weigth power mains
208. of TRANSForM A UGX Graphic Card digital and analog out 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 GND shield return for 5V Hsync and Vsync 0 green GND 0 Hsync 0 Vsync GND GND 1 Vsync 1 Hsync GND 1 green GND 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 0 Datal 0 Data1 0 Clock 0 Clock 0 Hot Plug detect 0 LED PGA Scaler detect 1 LED PGA 1 Hot Plug detect 1 Clock 1 Clock 1 Data1 1 Data1 A A O 0I i OO o 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 16 m 15 30 0 Data0 0 Data0 0 Data2 0 Data2 Int Scaler 1 Data2 1 Data2 1 Data0 1 Data0 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 15 14 13 12 11 aon WO N W A UI 7 Technical appendix GND 0 red 0 blue GND 0 5V Power 0 DDC clock 0 DDC data GND 1 DDC data 1 DDC clock 1 5V Power GND 1 blue 1 red GND Figure 7 1 Dual DVI connector digital analog out Dual DVI to 2xDVI D adapter cable 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Dual DVI to 2xCRT adapter cable wi Aa W N Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 Data0 Data0 Data0 Shield Clock Shield Clock Clock red green blue GND 10
209. of de interlacing mode for interlaced sources 5 different modes are available They should be selected depending on the content of the displayed video Mode 12 PC mode Mode 13 film mode Mode 14 sport Mode 15 advanced Mode 16 auto selection of one of the four modes above Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1__ 4 31 4 Operating Frame Rate Reduction Setting of the dynamic reduction factor of the frame rate The static frame rate reduction which is determined by the input mode please refer to section 4 6 1 The input cards Dual DVI Input Card can additionally be reduced by this factor slider bar Range from 0 255 determines the dynamic reduction factor f x 256 x 256 f 0 1 i e no further reduction f 255 1 256 i e maximal reduction The value x is shown when clicking on the slider the resulting frame rate is displayed next to the None radio button Variable Slider bar is enabled Normal Default None Input frame rate is used if possible Auto Preset Activate the auto detect of source timing settings Only with source type 3 4 In case of a signal loss a blue window is displayed and the string no signal is shown within the Presets instead of the before used timing Auto Position Activate auto detect of source position Only with source type 3 Noise Reduction Noise reduction in the range of 0 to 16 0 no noise reduction 1 mos
210. of the installation script This section describes the additional part for configuring multiple logical screens More information concerning multiple logical screens can be found in the sections 4 1 Multi screen capability and 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A The configuration runs mostly along the X 11 configuration and the con figuration of a distributed system Mode of multiple logical screens Select the multiple logical screens mode If you select separate mode you are also prompted to indicate whether you want cursor wrap or not Please see the keyword NoCursorwrap in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A geometry Configuring the Multiple Logical Screen X Server There are two modes of MLS operation 1 Contiguous mode 2 Separate mode Please enter the MLS mode 1 Switching on the cursor wrap around feature yes no no no Subnet and rendering machines Next the Sub net and the rendering machines are configured Please see section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system The number of rendering machines graphic engines is asked For each rendering machine the IP address and the arrangement must be specified The position of the machine is only asked if you configure continuous mode Furthermore the type of the graphic card must be indicated and the depth resolution must be assigned Subnet Configuration Enter IP Address for the subnet NIC card 192 168 1 254 Enter Sub Netmask of graphi
211. olche an Software werden nur insoweit bertragen als es f r die Erreichung des speziellen Vertragszwecks erforderlich ist Zuwiderhandlungen k nnen zu Schadensersatz verpflichten Alle Rechte aus der Erteilung eines Patents oder der Eintragung eines Gebrauchsmusters verbleiben bei uns Copyright 1997 2008 by Barco All rights reserved No part of this document may be copied reproduced or translated It shall not otherwise be recorded transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior written consent of Barco Guarantee and compensation Barco provides a guarantee relating to perfect manufacturing as part of the legally stipulated terms of guarantee On receipt the purchaser must immediately inspect all delivered goods for damage incurred during transport as well as for material and manufacturing faults Barco must be informed immediately in writing of any complaints The period of guarantee begins on the date of transfer of risks in the case of special systems and software on the date of commissioning at the latest 30 days after the transfer of risks In the event of justified notice of complaint Barco can repair the fault or provide a replacement at its own discretion within an appropriate period If this measure proves to be impossible or unsuccessful the purchaser can demand a reduction in the purchase price or cancellation of the contract redhibition All other claims in particular those relating to compensation for dir
212. ollowing steps must be performed to get a backup of the current state of an TRANSForm A configuration e After finishing the configuration reboot TRANSForM A to make sure that the configuration is really functional e If the TRANsForm A rebooted properly and the system works the way it was intended then locally log in on TRANSFORM A as root Take care that the X server does not run and enter to the command line service eosxs with the option backup service eosxs backup e Date and time of the last backup is displayed and you will be prompted to confirm the backup procedure by typing y e Now the system changes into a lower operating level and copies the working partition onto the backup par tition When copying is finished the system reboots from the working partition and can be used as before but with the security of having an actual system backup for the unlikely but not impossible case of a cor rupted file system on the working partition Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLLL 4 67 4 Operating Restore procedure Whenever it is necessary to go back to a saved configuration or to restore the working partition one out of two possible procedures can be performed Either e When booting TRANsForm A the option backup can be selected It either must be selected from the graphical menu when the system comes up please refer to section 3 3 2 Switching on or the
213. on the type of the TRANSForRM A PROCESSOR BIOS for AGS 3389 0 1 2 3 With AGs 3389 0 1 2 3 please make sure that the following BIOS parameters are set as given below Main Boot Options Quiet Boot Disabled Primary Display PCI Boot Sequence Diskette CD ROM Drive Hard Drive Legacy LAN Card de Advanced Peripheral Confguration ATA Controller Config S ATA Mode Compatible for PATA hard disks Native for SATA hard disks P ATA Maps To Primary for PATA hard disks Secondary for SATA hard disks LAN Controller Disabled Audio Controller Disabled Hyper Threading Disabled Advanced System Confguration NX Memory Protection Disabled Power ACPI Save To RAM Disabled Power On Off LAN Disabled Power Failure Recovery Disabled installation The system will not boot with this setting changed BIOS for AGS 3390 2 With AGs 3390 2 please make sure that the following BIOS parameters are set as given below Advanced Boot Features Quiet Boot Mode Disabled Power Loss Control Stay Off POST Errors Disabled PCI Configuration Default Primary Video Adapter Other ROM Scan Ordering Addon First Hardware Monitor Fan Speed Control Modes 5 4 pin Workstation Processsor options execute disable bit Disabled Boot 1 Legacy Floppy Drives 2 IDE CD 3 IDE 0 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 If using the solid stated drive the setting of the S ATA Mode may not be changed after the
214. on to the building protective earth If not the service person shall arrange for the installa tion of a protective earthing conductor from the separate protective earthing terminal to the protective earth wire in the building 1 3 3 Unpacking of devices Note advises on the packaging for unpacking 1 3 4 Installation Do not place this unit on an unstable cart stand or table The unit may fall causing serious damage to it Do not use this unit near water Use only the power cord supplied with your unit While appearing to be similar other power cords have not been safety tested at the factory and may not be used to power the unit For a replacement power cord contact your dealer Slots and openings in the cabinet and the sides are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the unit and to protect it from overheating these openings must not be blocked or covered The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This unit should not be placed in a built in in stallation or enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided The maximum recommended ambient temperature for this equipment is 40 C When using the unit in a multi unit rack assembly or closed assembly the ambient temperature inside the assembly may not succeed the maximum rated ambient temperature When installed in a rack the
215. ontrol panel xvideo foo canvas title foo control panel xvideo dummy ctrl title dummy control panel xvideo dummy canvas title dummy control panel xvideo can be started two times with different settings eos root xvideo name xvideo foo eos root xvideo name xvideo dummy Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 43 4 Operating Classes An important component of the resource concept are classes The xvideo client belongs to the xVideo Class Indeed all mentioned resources belong to this class This way it is possible to define settings which effect all xvideo clients E g XVideo encoding PAL XVideo recording VHS is evaluated by both clients xvideo foo and xvideo dummy concerning the example above Path of resource files The resources are stored in resource files These files must be located in certain directories and must be named correctly These paths and variables are evaluated in this sequence e usr lib X11 app defaults XVideo e SXAPPRLESDIR XVideo e RESOURCE_MANAGER or if empty Xdefaults e SXENVIRONMENT or if empty Xdefaults lt hostname gt e options on the command line Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 __1__1__1__1__1__1__1__1_ 4 44 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo class concerning the control panel option ctrl title ctrl geometry ctrl visible
216. ore details Multi color depth With the multi color depth option of the X server two color modes 8 bit PseudoColor and 16 bit TrueColor are available for X clients in parallel The root window runs in one color mode whereas X clients may also display windows in the other color mode Multi color depth can be configured in the following way e 8 bit PseudoColor for the root window and 8 bit PseudoColor or 16 bit TrueColor as Option for X clients e 16 bit TrueColor for the root window and 8 bit PseudoColor or 16 bit TrueColor as Option for X clients By default most X clients start in the same color mode that the X server uses for the root window Some X clients have the ability to use alternatively another color mode There are two types of such X clients that can make use of this feature e Xclients that need to be started with an option identifying the wanted color mode e xX clients that have the ability to automatically start in the color mode most suitable to display their content This feature is available with UGX GraPHic Caros and for resolutions up to 1400x1050 OmniScaler The OMNISCALER enables to display video and RGB sources no matter in what color mode and color depth the X server operates Thus optimal integration of 8 bit PseudoColor applications with high quality video and RGB display is possible If the X server operates in 8 bit PseudoColor mode the video RGB window is displayed in YUV4 2 2 16 bit TrueColor mode Complete
217. osxvideo 4 2 0 1 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ _ 4 69 4 Operating 4 8 7 Network reporting utility procfg The procfg utility serves to gain information about the configuration and state of the network cards It can be used for network cards that use the driver e100 or e1000 please refer to section 3 4 1 System configuration The information can be requested as follows procfg lt option gt The following command line options are the most useful option argument value meaning bpbliank etni nr t lt seconds gt The LED on the Ethernet card with the specified number lt nr gt starts fast blinking for 10 seconds If t is indicated the LED blinks during the specified time interval Cres Displays an overview about the inserted network cards including an AFT team teams lists name and mode of the team and information about its primary adapter please refer also to section 6 1 7 Redundant network adapter m lists all members of the team and their current properties i lists interface name IP address netmask broadcast and state of the team members P lists the load time parameters and values of the team members adeo ters TA Information about the link state speed and duplex of the network cards and AFT teams is displayed Table 4 54 Options of the procfg utility More information about procfg can be found in the manual pag
218. ount of video and RGB sources an additional ExTENDER may be used This setup is called Processor configura tion PROCESSOR TCP IP Figure 2 2 8 channel Processor in Processor configuration Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11 2 3 2 Summary Distributed system In a distributed system one Processor is used as central device It is equipped with keyboard and mouse Via a sub net the central Processor controls the rendering machines Each rendering machine consists of a PROCESSOR used as rendering Processor and one or two OmniBus devices The rendering Processor is the host computer of its one or two OmniBus devices The distributed system enables to set up display walls of any size where video windows can freely be moved It can be used within an OmniBus configuration as well as in a Processor configuration OMNIBUS Rendering Processor 2 _ _ gt _ Ethernet TCP IP L Central Processor Ethernet TCP IP X Window Figure 2 3 48 channel distributed system in an OmniBus configuration Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 use
219. perating 4 4 X Server extensions Besides some standard X server extensions TRANSForM A offers a set of additional specialized X server extensions These extensions are mentioned here briefly Full documents for software development are available on request X MultiCursor XMC The X MultiCursor extension allows the simultaneous use of several mouse pointers which can be moved inde pendently from each other over the root window The XMC extension behaves like the standard X 11 input ex tension of the X Consortiums and can be handled exactly the same way Note that the X MultiCursor can not be used simultaneously together with multiple logical screens see section 4 1 Multi screen capability X Blink With the X Blink extension a blinking property can be put on shared color cells A blinking color has two color information These two colors are changed with an optional frequency DIN blinking frequencies are provided X Video The X Video extension for connecting a Barco video input card is dealt with in detail in the following chapter X UCL This extension is required for Osiris The functionality includes authorization mechanisms for X Clients and support of constraint areas for windows X MVGS This extension is required for Osiris It offers layout configuration management and remote pointer only in the contiguous mode Q Multiple logical screens can be used together with Osiris and the X MVGS X UCL extension X Ge
220. presets for RGB sources and HDTV signals In addition user defined timings can be saved The timing and aspect ratio of the connected signal is detected automatically The card provides two input modes Dual input mode to display two signals simultaneously and single input mode for specially demanding sources The mode is automatically switched depending on the signal that is ap plied at In 1 In single input mode the second input is not available dual input mode single input mode In 1 analog signals up to 170 MHz pixel clock analog signals up to 340 MHz pixel clock digital signals up to about 288 MHz pixel clock digital signals up to 330 MHz pixel clock In 2 analog signals up to 170 MHz pixel clock digital signals up to 165 MHz pixel clock Table 4 3 Input modes of DUAL DVI INPUT CARD The Duar DVI Input Caro has an automated static frame rate reduction depending on number and type of the sig nals it processes please see the table below static frame rate reduction signals lt 1280x720 60 50 Hz 1 signals between 1280x720 60 50 Hz and 1920x1080 60 50 Hz 1 2 signal gt 1920x1080 60 50 Hz 1 4 Table 4 4 Static frame rate reduction for Dual DVI Input Card The X video application allows selecting additionally a dynamic frame rate reduction of the source which must be multiplied by the static frame rate reduction to obtain the overall frame rate reduction Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision
221. put Card The Duar DVI INPuT CARD provides the capability of displaying video or RGB signals provided as digital or analog data Either two signals up to 165 MHz pixel clock e g 1920x1080 60Hz or one signal up to 330 MHz pixel clock e g 2048x2048 60Hz can be captured for further processing in TRANSFoRM A Standard The input formats SDTV analog HDTV analog and digital and RGB analog and digital DVI D are supported Connectors The Duar DVI Input Caro has two DVI I connectors Each is for connecting one input signal to TRANSForm A The up per one In 1 is a dual link DVI I connector which must be used if a high resolution signal is applied that uses dual link In 1 is also the connector that is used to connect a signal in single input mode 1 input channel 1 DVI I dual link 2 input channel 2 DVI I Figure 3 31 connector of DUAL DVI INPUT CARD Adapter cables For the connection of the variety of supported source signal types to the DVI I connectors of the card a range of dedicated cables and adapters is optionally available Digital signals DVI D single link copper or optical DVI D lt gt DVI D cable see section 7 3 Order codes DVI D dual link suitable copper or optical DVI D dual link cable in doubt contact the customer support 8 3 Hot line The cable must be connected to In 1 HDMI single link HDMI to DVI D adapter see section 7 3 Order codes Analog signals HD15 connectors HD15 gt DVI A adapter see section 7
222. r please refer to Figure 3 1 front view of the Processor e Unlock the front cover of the Processor with the key e Pull the handle of the filter mounting 2 into your direction e Pull out the filter mounting to the right e Remove the old filter pad e Insert a new filter pad e Insert the mounting into the Processor until the handle engages e Lock the front cover As long as the filter pad is not irreversibly blocked cleaning it with a vacuum cleaner is also an acceptable method to maintain good air ventilation within the system 5 1 2 Replacing the filter pad of OmniBus A12 and Extender The filter pads of OmniBus A12 and ExteNDeR devices have to be changed in intervals depending on the grade of pollution of the air The air filter is located behind the ventilation slits 1 on the front of the device please refer to Figure 3 7 Front view of OmniBus A12 and Figure 3 13 Front view of the Extender respectively e Unlock the ventilation flap by turning its ock 2 with the key and open it e Remove the old filter pad e Insert a new filter pad e Turn the ventilation flap upwardly and close it by turning the ock 2 As long as the filter pad is not irreversibly blocked cleaning it with a vacuum cleaner is also an acceptable method to maintain good air ventilation within the system Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 52 5 Maintenance 5 1 3 Replacing a
223. r AGS 3389 AGS 3390 order options X 11 preinstalled operating system X server english language of user s manual English DRV 3356 0 DVD ROM drive for software upgrades AGX 3281 1 UGX GRAPHIC CARD with DVI D adapter cable digital AGX 3281 0 UGX GRAPHIC CARD for TRANSFORM A Dual DVI connector 4 channels CBL 3242 0 Dual DVI to 2xDVI D adapter cable AGX 3281 2 UGX GRAPHIC CARD with CRT adapter cable analog AGX 3281 0 UGX GRAPHIC CARD for TRANSFORM A Dual DVI connector 4 channels CBL 3243 0 Dual DVI to 2xCRT adapter cable AGX 3313 1 OMNISCALER with Dual DVI cable digital AGX 3313 0 OMNISCALER Dual DVI connector 2 channels CBL 3264 0 Dual DVI to Dual DVI cable Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ _ 7 18 7 Technical appendix R9842979 R9842978 R983 2670 R9842986 R9842987 R9842985 NET 3283 0 NET 3283 3 NET 3395 0 NET 3395 2 EOS 3052 1 TAS 3232 0 WST 3336 0 TAS 3401 0 TAS 3401 1 NET 2826 1 Spare parts MEM 3213 5 MEM 3213 6 MEM 3391 0 MEM 3391 1 R9842976 PSU 3284 0 PCX 3363 9 PCX 3321 0 PCX 3342 0 DRV 3349 9 DRV 3310 9 DRV 3393 9 DRV 3394 9 DRV 3402 9 EOS 3104 0 EOS 3104 1 PCX 3225 0 Cables and adapters CBL 3206 0 CBL 3206 2 CBL 3206 3 CBL 3206 4 R9842989 R9842990 R9842991 R9842992 CBL 3242 0 CBL 3243 0 CBL 3264 0 CBL 3264 1 QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 STREAMI
224. r SNMP TCP port 513 for rlogin TCP port 514 for rsh TCP port 22 for secure shell the following daemons are enabled rsh daemon login daemon secure shell daemon all ports are enabled the following daemons are enabled rsh daemon login daemon secure shell daemon User defined don t change the existing firewall policies TCP UDP ports rsh daemon login daemon secure shell daemon None of these ports and daemons is disabled Changes in the configuration of these ports and daemons by the user will not be changed by the X 11 configuration Table 3 5 Security options Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLLL _ 3 59 3 Getting started Setting the Eos FireWall Policies If you want to configure the Eos as secure X Terminal choose the policy high then only X11 Connection are permitted Choose one of the FireWall Policies 1 High 2 Medium 3 Disable 4 Don t change the existing FireWall Policy Enter the FireWall Policies 2 2 You have chosen the FireWall Policy Medium Is this correct yes no yes y Finishing the configuration If you do install a monolithic TRANSForm A configuration is done and the script is finished with the next step When configuring a distributed system you have to specify the data for the central device and the rendering machines See section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system
225. r con nector contains port 0 and 1 the lower one contains port 2 and 3 Thus the sequence of the graphic channels is board 1 2 3 port 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Figure 3 23 For non default sequence see section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 3 18 3 Getting started The Barco projection modules are assigned from left to right view from in front of the screens or if arranged in a square numbered in rows starting at the top left Figure 3 24 Numbering of projection channels This numbering is carried on for distributed systems For each rendering machine the modules are numbered as described VGA adapter For configuring a distributed system the graphical output of the central device must be Torm displayed somewhere Therefore a VGA monitor can be connected to the onboard VGA adapter of the central processor please refer to section 3 1 1 Processor Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 19 3 Getting started 3 2 6 OmniScaler In addition to graphic cards also OMNISCALERS are a substantial part of TRANSForM A to connect to projection mod ules The OMNISCALERS provide the ability to integrate video and RGB data into the graphical data from the graphic cards Ther
226. r s manual Revision 11 August 2008 24 3 Getting started 3 Getting started This chapter describes the set up of TRANSFoRM A X Terminal and provides you with a guide through the software configuration If your TRANSForM A is already configured within your working place you can skip this chapter and continue with chapter 4 Operating Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1__1__1__1__1__1_1 31 3 Getting started 3 1 Examining 3 1 1 Processor The Processor is available in several configurations differing in the type of the CPU the power supply and the system mainboard The table below lists the possible configurations and related product codes which are used further on to indicate a particular device where applicable standard power supply redundant power supply Pentium IV 3 4 GHz 6 PCI slots AGS 3328 2 AGS 3328 3 Pentium IV 3 6 GHz 4 PCI slots 3 PCle slots AGS 3389 0 AGS 3389 1 Core 2 Duo 2 13 GHz 4 PCI slots 3 PCle slots AGS 3389 2 AGS 3389 3 Single Xeon Dual Core 6 PCI slots AGS 3390 2 The front y Irans onm 12 13 Vi 1 air supply 2 handle of filter mounting 3 restart button 4 reserved 5 buzzer reset button power module failed only applicable with redundant power supply 6 red LED power module failed only applicable with redundant power supply 7 yellow LED hard disk access 8 green LE
227. r yes the item is called up during custom configuration and status O stands for no item is not called up Blank lines as well as unknown keywords are ignored Following table shows the standard configuration for custom configuration as stored in MMTProfile ASK_ PRIMARY NIC_TYPE O Type of interface 100 Mbps BNC ASK_X11_CURSOR 0 Size of X 11 cursor ASK_X11_ MOUSE O Type of X 11 mouse ASK_X11_FONTSERVER 0 IP address and port number of font server ASK_X11_BITPERPIXEL O Color depth bit per pixel ASK_X11_VISUALCLASS 0 Visual class ASK_X11_XDM 0 IP address of XDM and type of query ASK_X11_MONITOR_TYPE 0 Type of monitor analog digital ASK_MONOLIT_SCREEN_MODE 0 Multi head multi screen ASK_MONOLIT SCREEN_ARRANGEMENT 1 __ Layout of multi screen mode ASK_MONOLIT_MON_RESOLUTION 0 Resolution of monitor ASK ENGINE NETWORK 0 IP address net mask broadcast address for rendering machine ASK_ENGINE_ETHERADDR 1 Ethernet address for rendering machine ASK_ENGINE_SCREEN_ARRANGEMENT 0 Multi screen layout for rendering machine ASK_ENGINE_NIC_TYPE 0 Type of interface of sub net network card ASK_MMT_ SECURE_MODE 0 Secure mode ASK_GRAPHIC_ACCELERATOR_TYPE O Type of graphic accelerator ASK_MX_ REFRESH_RATE 0 Refresh rate of AGX UGX GRAPHIC CARD Table 6 1 Please keep in mind that an entry set to zero does not disable the respective feature But its properties are not questioned during custom configuration Barco TransForm A
228. rd disk in the middle position a row of eight indicators which display the different operating modes of the system The extensive documentation of the LED codes can be found on the documentation CD of the RAID system Please note for the SATA RAID 1 systems A hard disk is already switched off by turning the frame lock key A hard disk should not be replaced when the system is turned off Doing so may lead to loss of data Figure 3 4 SATA RAID 1 hard disk drives Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 4 The back 3 Getting started Processor with standard power supply left and detail of a Processor with redundant power supply right 14 15 16 17 14 18 19 20 21 24 eeeeeeaceoeaeoeeoeogconvne aeeaeeeseseoonvnoaoeoeeonvoeoeaooaoeoeodeeed RI eee ee eee eee ee eee th RA BRRRRRRRN eeododoopoccoooooooo i Seesesessesssssse o o o oH 8 Tsdeessecesseess 3 WF O 5 Osto a e a atat sissseseeees eeeeeeedee2eee0008080880 8 f 3383 Ee e SS J mo mo 25 35 26 27 28 y 35 36 So B 26 27 28 29 31 32a a 14 air supply 15 genlock loop through in 16 remote power on off connector genlock loop through out 17 external genlock in models AGS 3328 2 3 and AGS 3390 2 models AGS 3389 0 1 2 3 18 COM2 P
229. rd simultaneously Quad SDI Video Card Four different digital video sources can be connected to a single QuAD SDI VIDEO Caro and displayed simultane ously Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___1__1__1__1__1__1__1_ 4 14 4 Operating Dual RGB Input Card The DUAL RGB INPUT CARD digitizes one or two analog monitor signals It supports two monitor signals with a pixel frequency between 10 MHz and 135 MHz The most common VESA timings are stored as presets In addition user defined timings can be saved The timing and aspect ratio of the connected RGB signal are detected automati cally The Duat RGB Input Caro has an automated static frame rate reduction depending on number of the signals it processes please see the table below static frame rate reduction a two signals 1 3 one signal 1 Table 4 2 static frame rate reduction for RGB sources The X video application allows selecting additionally a dynamic frame rate reduction of the source which must be multiplied to the static frame rate reduction to obtain the overall frame rate reduction please refer also to section 4 6 4 Displaying video and RGB signals Dual DVI Input Card The Duar DVI INPUT CARD processes one or two signals These can be sources of multiple types composite video or S Video analog or digital RGB sources or component video The most common VESA timings and HDTV timings are stored as
230. retrl_host host name retrl_port 13579 retrl_wall 1 retrl_switch 1 entry argument default meaning retri enable OE il Activates deactivates hot keys rctrl_key1 E e IL I Defines first key for hot keys roir key IK o e Defines second key for hot keys Bet ene lt hostname gt Local hiost Specifies hostname or IP address where the rctr1 daemon is started ECE MPO Port To Specifies port of the recria daemon Default should not be changed reCic ie ll yee LIL Ca slay Wa m 1 Specifies type of OverView display wall 1 OVERVIEW ML 2 OVERVIEWw MP ATLAS6 C4 PSI 3 OVERVIEwW MD reterii switcher lt switcherType gt ii Specifies type of multiplexer 1 HERMES V2A HERMES VXA HERMES D2D HERMES DXD Table 6 4 For rctrl_keyl and retrl_key2 all key codes defined within the X 11 include file keysymdef h can be specified The hot keys for TRANSForm A are listed in section 4 7 4 Hot keys osiris This section starts with the keyword osiris and defines configuration parameters for Osiris It is only added if Osiris is installed on the system This section should not be changed manually Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 6 15 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 7 Redundant network adapter To obtain a redundant network connection to the LAN the Processor can be equipped with multiple network cards or onboard LAN adapters which form an AFT Adapter Fault Tolerance team A team cons
231. rs separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on STE ONE i see option qavBoardChannelNumber above double Sy NO see option qavDirtyEdges above String Live see option qavPlayMode above Table 4 30 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo class concerning the Streaming Video Card mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg mpg Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 refreshRate contrast brightness saturation boardMenu boardNumber boardChannelMenul boardChannelMenu64 boardChannelNumber dirtyEdges playMode preset presetName PAE L see option mpgRefreshRate above double Oe see option mpgContrast above coubie OSS see option mpgBrightness above double Oe see option mpgSaturation above String IGS ES Ga AES WAS Salley Sets the names of the video card appearing in the video cards menu 64 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first video card and so on AHE ill see option mpgBoardNumber above Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Sets the names of the video channels of the first video card appearing in the channel menu 4 names each 12 characters separated by are al lowed First name matches first adapter and so on Se ie alike Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Sets the name
232. rver 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 gt 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 Everything correct yes no yes y Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ 3 58 3 Getting started Fire wall A firewall security level can be set Four different levels high medium disabled user defined can be chosen to disable unneeded network services The four security levels allow selecting between the following characteristics General Restrictions X Display Manager Font Server Network File System Root Filesystem High TCP UDP ports daemons Medium TCP UDP ports daemons Disable TCP UDP ports daemons X Display Manager xdm can only be started and port 177 is only accessible if it was indicated in the section above X Display Manager to start xdm The Font Server xfs can only be used if it was indicated in the section above Font Server to use a Font Server The Network File System NFS is only activated if a distributed system is configured The root filesystem is only exported if a distributed system is config ured and it can only be mounted to the rendering machines all ports less or equal 1023 are disabled except TCP UDP port 177 for XDMCP TCP UDP port 161 for SNMP the following daemons are disabled rsh daemon login daemon secure shell daemon all ports less or equal 1023 are disabled except TCP UDP port 177 for XDMCP TCP UDP port 161 fo
233. s 2 1 12 4 3 Reordering of a new engine yes no no y Enter graphic engine s number for reordering 2 2 Channel Reordering 1 redefine reordering 2 take default no reordering Enter selection 1 1 Enter the list of the default channels 1 2 123 4 Enter the list of the new channels 2 1 43 21 Reordering of a new engine yes no no n These are the Reordering Settings for the Distributed X Server engine_1l 1 2 3 4 gt 1 2 4 3 engine_2 1 2 3 4 gt 4 3 2 1 Everything correct yes no yes y Logical video channels The assignment of the adapters of QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARDS DUAL DVI INPUT CARDS or QUAD SDI VIDEO Caros to logic video channels can be defined This assignment is explained in detail in section 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A video The numbers of the assigned channels result like described there and have to be inserted into the lines of the respective rendering machines engine 1 etc Logical Video Channels This is the configuration part for the assignment of Phisical Video Adapters to Logical Video Channels This assignment specifies which video is displayed on which part of the Display wall Please read the section X Server Configuration in the User s Manual Eos X Terminal Do you want to proceed yes no no y Logical Video Channels 1 define Video settings 2 take default Video settings Enter selection 1 1 Enter for each video cha
234. s standard AGS 3389 3 Processor Core 2 Duo 2 13 GHz 19 In 4 PCI slots 3 PCle slots with red power supply AGS 3390 2 PROCESSOR single Xeon Dual Core 19 In 6 PCI slots with redundant power supply AGS 3359 0 OmniBus A12 19 In with redundant power supply AGS 3335 0 OmniBus A18 19 In standard hot swappable fans AGS 3335 1 OmniBus A18 19 In redundant power supply hot swappable fans EOS 3193 1 EXTENDER 13 slots 19 In with redundant power supply DRV 3349 0 hard drive PATA in removable frame for AGs 3328 order options please indicate X 11 preinstalled operating system X server english language of user s manual English DRV 3310 0 RAID 1 controller PATA including 2 hard drives for AGS 3328 AGS 3389 AGS 3390 order options please indicate X 11 preinstalled operating system X server english language of user s manual English DRV 3393 0 hard drive SATA in removable frame for AGS 3389 AGS 3390 order options X 11 preinstalled operating system X server english language of user s manual English DRV 3394 0 RAID 1 controller SATA including 2 hard drives for AGS 3389 AGS 3390 order options X 11 preinstalled operating system X server english language of user s manual English DRV 3402 1 RAID 5 controller SATA including 3 hard drives for AGS 3389 AGS 3390 order options X 11 preinstalled operating system X server english language of user s manual English R9861443 Solid state drive SATA in removable frame fo
235. s above altar 6 see option drgbReduction above allergies iL see option drgbPreset above SENG DREGE HIDRCETZAIIIBDRCE nE Sets the names of the video card appearing in the video cards menu 128 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first video card and so on TE lL see option drgbBoardNumber above Siig Channel 1 Channel 2 Sets the names of the adapters of the first video card appearing in the channel menu 2 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on SaGniaals axe Channel 1 Channel 2 Sets the names of the adapters of the 128 video card appearing in the channel menu 2 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so on rales see option drgbBoardChannelNumber above SCG Live see option drgbPlayMode above Table 4 34 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLL 4 50 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo class concerning config and preset files option configFile noConfigFile presetFile factoryPresetFile mpgPresetFile mpgBoardFile argument default meaning SME 16 11016 ewe MMT On e a TAC ore inas see option configFile above see option noConfigFile above CELNI CO NMT OnT r PEE e eoep E see option presetFile above SE iG ope MEO 6 Ste a ao e ea see option factoryPreset
236. s of the video channels of the 64 video card appearing in the channel menu 4 names each 12 characters separated by are al lowed First name matches first adapter and so on Sie aac sea ye il see option mpgBoardChannelNumber above double AU see option mpgDirtyEdges above Senami Live see option mpgPlayMode above TOANE I see option mpgPreset above STE 16 aL Ge see option mpgPresetName above Table 4 31 4 Operating Resources of the XVideo class concerning the Quad SDI Video Card qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi qsdi refreshRate contrast brightness saturation boardMenu boardNumber boardChannelMenul boardChannelMenu64 boardChannelNumber dirtyEdges playMode PAR l see option qsdiRefreshRate above double Os see option qsdiContrast above double OFS see option qsdiBrightness above double OS see option qsdiSaturation above String GSD UlOs Dil AOS Pikes ine Sets the names of the video card appearing in the video cards menu 64 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first video card and so on TANE Il see option qsdiBoardNumber above SE ENNE Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Sets the names of the adapters of the first video card appearing in the channel menu 4 names each 12 characters separated by are allowed First name matches first adapter and so o
237. s reserved for the CPU board and connector link slot is reserved for the connection to Processor In the following sections reference is taken to the numbering of the PCI slots 1 12 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _ ____1__1__1__1__1__1_1_1 3 9 3 1 3 OmniBus A18 Each OmniBus A18 provides eighteen PCI expansion slots They can be used for Barco s UGX or AGX GRAPHIC CARDS OMNISCALERS QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARDS DUAL DVI INPUT CARDS DUAL RGB INPUT CARDS and STREAMING VIDEO CARDS and QUAD SDI VIDEO CARDS The front 3 Getting started Although the backplane of the OmniBus A18 is based on standard 64bit 66MHz PCI bus it is highly recommended to not insert other cards than those mentioned above Other cards will not work due to the missing driver support and there is also a risk to damage the OmniBus A18 or the inserted cards Ventilation flap with air supply LED operating status off red green red blinking power switch 26 on the back switched off power switch 26 switched on system in stand by power switch 26 switched on OmniBus A18 is started either by the On Off push button 4 or via the remote power cable by the Processor All power modules that are currently in the OmniBus A18 are working well Power failure at one power module only with redundant power supplies One housing fan runs too slow or not at all Overtemperature at temperat
238. sForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ _ 3 46 3 Getting started After switching on the Processor boot information is displayed on the graphic device connected to port 0 of the first graphic card TE When switching on the central Processor of a distributed system this text is displayed on the connected monitor The other displays show their respective bus and slot no e g PCI Bus 2 PORD 1 There are two possible boot modes for TRansForm A Normal boot mode and eXtended safety boot mode See section 6 1 1 Boot modes The operation of TRANSForm A differs a little depending on this mode Normal boot mode After a few minutes the graphical user interface X 11 appears without user interaction eXtended safety boot mode The TRANSForm A startup screen comes up Select linux to boot from the working partition If you select backup the restore procedure is started and the working partition becomes overwritten with the backup system which may lead to a loss of current data depending on the state of the backup please see section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures eosxs Utility Press control x for text mode Figure 3 53 TRANSFORM A startup screen After a few minutes the graphical user interface X 11 appears Configuration If software configuration has already been carried out you can go on with chapter 4 Operating Otherwise proceed configuring TRANSForM
239. sceseensceaeens 5 3 28 ONNO Perea ere Ree E eee ee eer oe een ee ere on eee 5 4 Ge ADVAN CEG CONT GUAM ON siccticsscacorscccesacececcsceecascceceasstanssdnabonssansnenaneag E E E E 6 1 6 1 Software installation and configuration sxcetesacsxacvns seesaw states niu tvon evades tadeetenntavyctacatornveeasann tase Gesoetaenetostacees 6 2 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11 vi MH OO ET OCS chen EEA ces hoses EA E E E eis salts anton dao EE A EEE ences eal 6 2 6 1 2 Installing system software on the hard drive uu ccc cecsccscescesceseessesscsecseesececsececseceseessesesseeseeaeens 6 3 OS WF AGING Sy en SONU ANG sern O dha Sauseasde dios E 6 6 Gal ACU LOM CONTOUR ACI IN orea E es teeeeanaedas eee ae ee 6 8 Gel SCIVEL DOIMO eau T A 6 9 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of Transform A s sesessesessssesesesesesnesessenesessenesesrenesesssrsnesisssnesisreresesesnen 6 10 6 1 7 Redundant network adaptef eee csccesceseessceseesscescesscsscesscsscesecsscessesscescessesscscesscescesseseesseeseenes 6 16 6 1 8 Mapping of USB devices hot plug detection ssso sesnnsensssensssnesnesesnesesnessssessesssnesesnesessesnesesnsnesees 6 18 Gk NEJEDIA COOR al OCAR ei NEE NN 6 19 6 1 10 BIOS settings for TransForm A PrOCeSSoOTf ccccessessessessessceccesceseeseeseesecsecsceseeeecessessesecsecseeseeseeaeenes 6 20 6 1 11 BIOS settings for rendering machines e s ssnnsesssesesesseses
240. sesecseeseeesceseens 4 8 Multicolor depla 4 5 multi head Mode ssi deccssensessinciaerarcoeaetanoder metsnooed 4 2 multi monitor operator station eee 2 2 multiple logical screens 0 cee eeeeeseeeeeees 4 2 6 10 GOMMQUG ATION sacs ets cctetins tials Sueteamend 3 54 3 65 Multiport 1 0 Card WMI A E E A E E E E eee 7 16 0 6 E EEE EE AEEA ERA TEE AT 3 29 MUUS Een N 6 8 multi screen capability 0 0 0 cece eeceeeeeees 2 2 4 2 multi screen server configuration 3 56 nearby color allocation ou eeeeeeees 4 5 6 19 Network CONFIQUIATION cee eeeeeeseeteeteeeees 3 50 network card EE RE E P E EA ATE A E TE 7 16 ORGS PREE A EI AEREE E E E E T 3 32 network card 1OOOMDPS cc eceeceeseeseeeseeseees 3 31 Network Card 1OOMDDS ccccceseessceseeseeseeeseens 3 31 network reporting utility 0 eee eeeees 4 70 normal boot MOE eee esceceseesseeseeseessesseesees 6 2 NI Gotan tesmete ene tesa E 4 16 GUS cies Gok asec Spa veeat sect e a ea 22 Expansion Slots iscssrsnmn nnn 3 12 OmniBus A12 expansion Slots corsen a 3 9 POUSSIN roncu nanen aa an 3 7 technical dalie 7 2 OmniBus A18 OUTS al eare tier aemnmmeticrneT ann ase ree 3 10 technical data ccc ccsccssessceseesecsseessessceseens 7 2 OMNIBUS configuration 0 ee eeeteeteeteeteeteeeees 2 3 OmniScaler backend SCANING sccccese2ecca vausantesandaes antes sctieeeathstes 4 12 color capabilities oo ee eee ceceseetseeseeteeeseens 4 5 Dual DVI interface wo eee ee
241. settings are saved per screen there fore Save As Xvideo Config File should be used instead Define position and size of Canvas Panel Opens a dialag to enter IP address and screen number of the screen that is connected to the current RGB channel Switches the remote pointer ability of the above set screen on or off i e the pointer of the TRANsForm A can be used to operate the screen displayed by the RGB channel Maps or unmaps the remote keyboard i e the keyboard of the TRANSFORM A can be used to operate the screen displayed by the RGB channel it is also switched to the country scheme of the keyboard Define settings of a STREAMING VIDEO CARD Define settings of video streams Only applicable for DuAL DVI INPUT CARD reads EDID data from the EDID PROM and saves it to a file please refer to section 4 6 4 Displaying video and RGB signals Dual DVI Input Card Only applicable for DuAL DVI INPUT CARD reads EDID data from a file and writes it to the EDID PROM The edges of video often show disturbances therefore an overscan of some 3 can be defined that will not be displayed Not applicable with DUAL RGB INPUT CARD and source type 3 4 of DuaL DVI INPUT CARD Set the default value 3 for video sources 0 for digital RGB DVI Set a user defined overscan value between 0 and 10 Close canvas panel Iconify canvas panel Raise canvas panel Close control panel Display help in canvas panel Table 4 6 A left mouse
242. sing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm with ISA retainer and front plate 352 18 mm x121 92 mm 250g 1 64 32bit Dual Voltage Signaling PCI edge connector 1 Dual DVI connector in 1 Dual DVI connector out Table 7 6 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 3 Streaming Video Card SVC 1 scaler CPU Frame Memory digital network carrier compression algorithm video formats bitrate supported encoders network transmission protocol connection protocols colors bus power supply power consumption operating conditions dimensions Weight connectors Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 Technical appendix 4 x Silicon Optix sxZX1 for 1 1 or downscaling 64MB SDRAM Base T Ethernet 10 100Mbps MPEG 1 ISO 11172 MPEG 2 ISO 13818 MP ML 4 2 0 DVB ETR 154 SPTS MPTS the DVB format is MPEG 2 based MPEG 4 part 2 ISO 14496 2 SP L3 ASP L5 Bosch MPEG 4 h263 MJPEG ISO 10918 MXPEG 2D Wavelet PAL NTSC 1 4 streams and max 44Mbps per board MPEG 1 up to 4 streams all resolutions MPEG 2 up to 4 D1 streams or 4 CIF streams 44Mbps per board max 15Mbps per stream up to 4 CIF streams or 3 2CIF streams or 1 2 4CIF streams de pends on resolution 32Mbps per board max 8Mbps per stream MPEG 4 part 2 MPEG 4 h263 up to 4 CIF streams or 4 2CIF streams or 4 4CIF streams MJPEG up to 4 C
243. sion 11 August 2008 1 5 1 Introduction Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord To disconnect the cord pull it out by the plug Never pull the cord itself If an extension cord is used with this product make sure that the total of the ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Should any liquid or solid object fall into the cabinet unplug the set and have it checked by qualified service personnel before resuming operations Lightning For extra protection for this video product during a lightning storm or when it is lift unattended and unused for a long period of time unplug it from the wall outlet This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and AC power line surges Due to high touch current the OmniBus A12 and the OmniBus A18 is intended to be used in a location having equipotential bonding The building installation shall provide a means for connection to protective earth The equipment is to be connected to that means A service person shall check whether or not the socket outlet from which the equipment is to be powered provides a connecti
244. size cvar ar ratioAspect cevra ra noBorder cvnb nb 4 Operating argument default meaning SIDE wing same as display Of SDISPLAY specifies another remote host for video display CETE xvideo canvas panel determines the window title of the canvas panel geometry Bo e SHA aa e a ON specifies position and size of the canvas panel color name blue Specifies the background color of the canvas panel To specify a color a name defined in the file rgb txt in the folder usr X11RELEASE6 lib X11 rgb txt must be used Oy al O iconifies 1 or resizes 0 the canvas panel Cena 1 enables 1 interactive resizing of the canvas panel Opt 1 restricts 1 re sizing of the canvas panel to constant ratio of width and height of the video O 0 starts the canvas panel with 0 or without 1 border Options concerning Quad Analog Video Card option qavRecording qavre qavRefreshRate qavrr qavContrast qavco qavBrightness qavbr qavSaturation qavsa qavBoardNumber qavbn qavBoardChannelNumber qavbc qavDirtyEdges qavde qavPlayMode qavpm Table 4 19 argument default meaning VHS SVHS VHS selects the recording standard SVHS only effective with model FRG 3292 0 heen 1 selects full 2 or half 1 refresh rate OO a ihe ue 0 5 determines the start value of contrast OPNO NO om5 determines the start value of brightness pelea TNO 0 5 determines the start value of saturation A
245. standard keyboard is a USB keyboard Plug it into one of the USB plugs 28 of the Processor Bard ee Figure 3 18 keyboard connection via USB Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______ 3 15 3 Getting started 3 2 4 Keyboard extension The keyboard extension allows a distant positioning of keyboard and mouse The figure below shows schematically the parts and the cabling of the keyboard extension The keyboard extension is made up of two extension boxes remote extension box REX 3 local extension box LEX 5 and two connection cables RJ 45 connection cable 20m 4 USB cable 6 Keyboard and mouse are plugged into the remote extension box instead of being plugged directly into the Processor The remote extension box is connected to the local extension box with the connection cable 20m The local extension box is connected to an USB port of the Processor with the provided USB cable which has on the one end a USB A plug and on the other a USB B plug N l 4 6 i i 1 l E N O i o aa ey m 7 a l mR am E N d 3 i 5 i l i M H I 0 i S l T 6 _ L o l o ooo l ee d l E an t l Ld l i d A 1 oy Meee 1 2 4 NL 1 mouse 2 keyboard 3 remote extension box REX 4 RJ 45 connection cable 20 m or optionally 50 m 5 local extension box LEX 6 USB cable 7
246. t connector Anyhow am depending on the connected source generating device it may be necessary to unplug and replug the data cable or even to reboot the source generating system Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1W1_WH__1_ 4 32 Control Lock RGB R G B Br Live Still DRGB 1 Channel 1 Preset Frame Rate Reduction Auto Preset Auto Position 4 Operating Control panel for Dual RGB Input Card Figure 4 10 Xvideo control panel Change red green and blue components together Intensity of red component Intensity of green component Intensity of blue component Brightness Start the RGB display Freeze the RGB display Select one DUAL RGB INPuT Caro the cards can be renamed Select video channel of the DUAL RGB INPUT CARD max 2 channels the channels can be renamed Select a timing current timing is indicated in the button Set the dynamic reduction factor of the frame rate range 0 1 2 15 The static frame rate reduction determined by the input mode please refer to section 4 6 1 The input cards Dual RGB Input Card can additionally be reduced by this factor 0 sets dynamic part of frame rate reduction to 1 best quality 4 sets dynamic part of frame rate reduction to 1 2 6 sets dynamic part of frame rate reduction to 1 3 15 sets dynamic part of frame rate reduction to 1 15 best performance Activate the auto detect
247. t modest level of noise reduction 16 maximum value Optimal noise reduction has to consider the content of the displayed source Table 4 14 The Input Settings and Registry tab is only available for sources of type 3 RGB analog or type 4 ces YUV analog These tabs are the same like for RGB sources of the DUAL RGB INPuT CARD For configura tion of these source types please refer to the respective explanation below EDID Prom and DDC EDID data Extended Display Identification Data can be loaded to the Duar DVI Input CARD to provide DDC data for the connected image source generator e g the graphic card of a computer that is connected to an input of the DUAL DVI INPUT CARD By default the Duar DVI INPUT CARD uses 1024X768 60Hz as DDC timing To adapt the DDC timing select the entry Write EDID Structure to DDVI from the file menu of the control panel see section 4 6 3 The Xvideo client The available EDID files are stored under the following path opt MMT2686 etc xvideo edid lt filename gt The names of the EDID files each start with Edid followed by the timing they contain e g Bdid1024x768 60Hz bin In case that you want to check which EDID file is currently stored in the EDID prom you can use the Read Edid Structure from DDVI entry from the file menu EDID data may be helpful when connecting RGB or component video sources to the DUAL DVI INPUT CARD When changing the EDID timing it is immediately available at the inpu
248. t power module Between these two buttons there are two LEDs the green LED power on 4 to the left is indicating if power is on The red LED power module failed 6 to the right indicates that a redundant power module is not operable Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 1111 3 13 The back 10 22 23 24 25 26 3 Getting started 24 23 24 23 9 10 22 23 25 26 25 26 link interface card slots for Barco s expansion cards ventilation slots mains connection power switch of power modules green LED individual power module operating Figure 3 14 rear view of EXTENDER In total there are 14 card slots visible from the back with the most left position having a fixed assignment for the link interface card 9 Graphic cards OmniScalers and input cards 10 22 follow depending on the con figuration of TRANSFORM A On the left there is the power supply with the mains connection 24 Each power module has an individual power switch 25 and a green LED 26 that indicates the operation of the power module The expansion slots The EXTENDER provides 13 PCI slots in two PCI segments Segment 2 Segment 1 PCIO PCI6 PCI5 PCI4 PCI3 PCI2 PCI1 PCI7 PCI6 PCI5 PCI4 PCI3 PCI2 PCI1 Figure 3 15 PCI Slots and Segments Connector PCI 0 is reserved for the link interface card to connect to the PROCESSOR Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Rev
249. then its parameters are not changed Pressing the Apply button applies the displayed parameters to the hardware In that way changes can be controlled directly Pressing the OK button applies the parameters to the hardware and to the system Pressing the Cancel button closes the window anyhow changes that are already confirmed with the Add or Delete button can not be revoked Figure 4 7 SVC Stream Params Editor of the STREAMING VIDEO CARD STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 left and STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 2 right SVC Stream Name A list of all video streams in alphabetic order Stream Settings IP Address IP address of the video stream Port Encoder port appendant to the IP address PID Should be entered for transport streams when the PAT program allocation tables or PMT program map tables are not sent 0 is a predefined value It causes an auto search for the video PID If no valid PID is found no video will be shown Only for SVC 7 IP Address select the type of the forwarding method unicast broadcast Of multicast when multicast is selected also the multicast IP address must be specified Stream Protocol auto Auto detection of the stream protocol elementary Elementary stream program Program stream transport Transport stream IP Protocol Selection of the used IP protocol firmware lt 2 0 of the STREAMING VIDEO CARD only supports uDP RTP and UDP are selectable Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s man
250. tion amp colors analog 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1152x864 1280x960 1280x1024 1600x1200 resolution amp colors digital video output stage bus connection supply voltage current consumption operating conditions dimensions weight plugs OmniScaler video RGB input format data input format data output format video source RAM bus connection supply voltage current consumption operating conditions dimensions weight plugs 7 Technical appendix 4xRadeon 7500 with 4x32 MB RAM 64 bit RISC processor with 64 MB SDRAM 8bpp 15 bpp 16 bpp 24 bpp 32 bpp 85 HZ 85 Hz 85 HZ 84 Hz 85 Hz 85 Hz 85 HZ 8 bpp 15 bpp 16 bpp 32 bpp up to 1920x1080 60Hz or 1920x1200 50Hz pixel clock digital 165 MHz pixel clock analog max 350 MHz PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 5 3 3 V 0 3 V 5 V max 2 5 A 3 3 V max 1 6 A 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm with ISA retainer and front plate 352 18 mm x121 92 mm 280 g 1 64 32bit Dual Voltage Signaling PCI edge connector 2 Dual DVI connector Table 7 5 YUV4 2 2 XRGB8 8 8 8 RGB8 8 8 RGB5 6 5 24 bpp PanelLink 24 bpp PanelLink in the resolution and timing of the input up to 1280x1024 AGX 3002 up to 1920x1200 AGX 3313 64 MB DDR SDRAM 64 bit PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 5 3 3 V 5 5V 3 0A 3 3V 1 4A 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non conden
251. tion software eee eeceeceetseteeseeseeseeeeeseens 3 49 connection cable oxiecresicechiewaducaisennseiens 3 16 EENE E E T OAE 7 17 CONSAN OOA Sarsia 4 8 COMTIGUOUS 5 ChE CNS weisectiacientbnsxssiucescedectasdiaction soso 6 10 CONDE OUD QIN C Nica eisai anton inca esate teedastindentaceeny 4 19 Dual DVI Input Cam eee eceeeeseeeseeeees 4 31 Dual RGB INPUT Cald eesis 4 33 ON different GESKtOPS cece eeeeeeseetseeseeeee 4 42 9 Index Quad Analog Video Card oc eee ceceseeseeseeneeees 4 22 Quad SDI Video Card 4 30 Remote Contool sarn nR 4 60 Streaming Video CAI eeceeseeseeseeseeteeseeees 4 23 CPU D dade NR 3 34 CRT monitor projector oo eee ceceseeesceteesseeseeeens 2 2 EA LL ORP PTAA E TOE E nesta 3 26 3 28 EO E A E N T 6 9 CUFSOF CONFIGUIATION nsnnsnononoeseeosnesosnesesesreseseseese 3 55 CUSTOM CONFIQUIATION cece eceeeeeeteeteeteeteeeeeee 6 8 CVD cease AE TEE A TEE TEE 3 22 OND PTEE ENEE EEEE TELE EEEE E EAT 3 22 DB ET E A E ere iri trea E E A 4 32 6 9 AAGA oarn EA 6 23 DOC UU ea Manes nansatianva 4 65 daan Oaa acaeeeoce nae 4 65 depth resolution configuration ccceeeeee 3 56 DirectColor sist scusacsdecinanesiaeleacoudscesbeesavatesdteeesiaene 4 4 4 5 dirty edges ODON Serer erent ere ei ner ee eee a 4 40 display definition eee ccceteesscesceteesseeseens 4 2 display Welles csscssscsnidudcanssdnigesas nnana 2 2 SUDGIVISI OM arna nera NAA 3 33 displaying video and RGB Signals
252. to 2048x2048 60 Hz analog input Pixel clock up to 340 MHz digital input Pixel clock up to 330 MHz Hsync Vsync Csync Sync on Green Sync level 1 V 5 V TIL 15 bpp 32K 16 bpp 64K 24 bpp 16M SDTV analog Composite S video HDTV analog and digital YPrPb YCrcb RGB RGB analog and digital PCI bus 32bit 33 MHz 64bit 66 MHz 5 V 2 3 3 V 0 3 V 12 V 10 12 V 410 5V 2 8 A 3 3 V 3 5 A 12 V 100 mA 0 50 C at 8 80 humidity non condensing PCI long card 312 00 mm x 121 92 mm 208 g 1 x 64 bit 3 3 5 V PCI edge connector 1 x DVI I dual link connector 1 x DVI I connector Table 7 11 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ____ _ 7 6 Dual RGB Input Card A D converter scaler CPU Frame Memory input colors internal frame rate input timing 1280x1024 60Hz and textmode 70Hz 2 X 1280x1024 60Hz 2 x 1280x1024 75Hz bus power supply power consumption operating conditions dimensions weight connectors 7 Technical appendix 2 x Analog Devices AD9888 via scaler algorithm in FPGA 64MB SDRAM up to SXGA 1280x1024 75 Hz input Pixel clock 20 MHz 135 MHz input Line frequency 15 kHz 115 kHz input Hsync Vsync Csync Sync on Green Sync level 1 V 5 V TIL 15 bpp 32K 16 bpp 64K 24 bpp 16M max frame rate with internal color depth of 16 bpp and 24 bpp dual input mode also other co
253. ual Revision 11 August 2008 11 4 25 Skip bytes at Start End Only for SVC 2 Encoder List Encoder Settings IP Address Port IP Protocol Startstring 4 Operating Encoder dependant value of the number of bytes that must be skipped at the beginning end of each packet please see table below List with the available encoder configurations This section contains data that is used if initial communication with the encoder is needed to prompt the encoder to send a stream All fields must be filled in IP address of the encoder may only be filled in if TCP has been selected for IP Protocol Port where the encoder listens to TCP start commands may only be filled in if TCP has been selected for IP Protocol Only for SVC 7 Should remain udp as indicated in the section Decoder control above Only if a commu nication with the encoder is required tcp should be selected String that is sent to the specified encoder Table 4 11 Parameters on the SVC Stream Params Editor a time is able to display one particular unicast stream Q As unicast streams are only sent to one single IP address only one Streaming Video Card at The following table lists the encoder specific values that must be entered into the Streams Params Editor They are valid with STREAMING VIDEO CARD SVC 1 with firmware 6 0 1 21 Encoder compression IP Skip bytes Skip bytes Stream TCP PID manufacturer type algorythm protocol at start at end proto
254. ulti screen and multi head mode the terms display and screen of X 11 terminology are important Display A display contains all input and output devices which are assigned to an X server Two or more displays may be installed on a single computer In this case several X servers are running each of which has its own keyboard mouse tablet etc and its own screen however both servers operate logically independent from each other so that two separate workplaces are available Screen A screen is a logic output device of an X server which is represented generally by a physical output device An X server can quite operate several screens However such a construction has only one keyboard and one mouse It is a workplace for a single person The difference between a conventional X server in multi head mode with several monitors and the multi screen capable TRANSForM A controlling a display wall is described below Multi head Every screen is represented in the multi head mode by a corresponding monitor and has its own root window An X client which is connected to this server can open windows on both screens However an individual window is always completely attached to a screen Moreover the client must be specifically programmed for the use of several screens what is hardly the case among standard X 11 applications In addition when starting such clients the output screen must be indicated immediately Finally there are only few window man
255. uments and default values and a short description Options concerning control panel option argument default P g meaning name Sea ling none changes application name and allows to specify a certain resource file display Ea i O D REAY specifies remote host ctrlTitle SEN xvideo control panel clt determines the window title of the xvideo control panel ctrlGeom geometry maom OO clg specifies position and size of the xvideo control panel ctrlVisible Cerra L clv shows 1 or hides 0 the xvideo control panel ctrlIconic Ore ik O cli iconifies 1 or resizes 0 the control panel followMouse ae ik fm starts the control panel at the standard position 0 or at the position of the mouse pointer 1 activeGrabber a a a ag selects QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD 4 DUAL RGB INPUT CARD 5 QUAD SDI VIDEO CARD 6 STREAMING VIDEO CARD 7 or DUAL DVI INPUT CARD 8 Table 4 17 Options concerning module video and module RGB option argument default meaning moduleVideo Chea ah O mv 1 video is displayed as Module Video RGB signals as Module RGB moduleGeometry geometry mg determines layout of Module Video and Module RGB Table 4 18 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 4 37 Options concerning canvas panel option canvasDisplay cvd canvasTitle cvt canvasGeom cvg canvasBackground cvbg canvasIconic CVi allowRe
256. und analog c4 Analog HSync c1 Analog Red R G amp B return c3 Analog Blue 8 Analog VSync 16 Hot Plug Detect 24 TMDS Clock 7 DDC Data 15 Ground return for 5V 23 TMDS Clock Hsync and Vsync 6 DDC Clock 14 5V 22 TMDS Clock Shield 5 TMDS Data4 13 TMODS Data3 21 TMDS Data5 4 TMDS Data4 12 TMDS Data3 20 TMDS Data5 3 TMDS Dataz2 4 shield 11 TMDS Data 3 shield 19 TMDS Data0 5 shield 2 IMDS Data2 10 TMDS Datal 18 TMDS Data0 1 TMDS Data2 9 TMDS Data1 17 TMDS Data0 Figure 7 8 DVI I connector 1 Dual link pins 4 5 12 13 20 21 only connected at In1 Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _1__1 _W1__1__1__1__ 7 14 Dual RGB Input Card in VU Aa WN red green blue sync GND PS 2 Keyboard and PS 2 Mouse 1 COM1 VU Aa WN Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 7 data GND DCD RxD TXD DTR GND O CON O 10 _hk 0 15 Q 11 6 red GND green GND blue GND sync GND 6 4 2 1 4 5 6 1 O On AO 5 11 12 13 14 15 7 Technical appendix H C SYNC VSYNC Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 7 15 Multiport 1 0 Card DCD RxD TXD DTR GND VU Aa WN Network card and onboard LAN adapter 7 Technical appendix DSR RTS CTS RI Figure 7 12 serial connector p
257. unlimited size The display area is one logically connected display Digital imaging devices based on modern technologies such as DLP and Poly Silicon LCD with the highest display quality are con trolled digitally Digital data transfer is immune to electromagnetic interference and therefore ensures the dis play wall picture to be displayed in absolutely distortion free image quality Analog monitors and projectors can also be controlled by TRANsForm A using the analog output mode of the graphic cards Thus multi monitor operator stations can be ergonomically designed and easily implemented DLP is a trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated The hardware and software of TRANsForm A is based on world wide accepted standards TRANSForm A offers the following exceptional capabilities e High performance graphics output using the most modern processor and chip technologies e TRANSFORM A OmniBus devices with dedicated Switch Fabric and intelligent high bandwidth backplane pro vides the optimized resources needed for graphic and video data integration e Supports current LAN and WAN interfaces e Graphic and video outputs in high color quality e Video in a window up and down scaleable up to full screen e Overlapping and freely moveable video and graphics windows of unlimited size e Up to 68 videos per display channel e Virtually unlimited number of projection modules in one wall e Virtually unlimited number of video sources per system e
258. ure 4 13 Redirected control panel Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 11111 4 4 4 Operating 4 6 6 The resource files You can adjust the behavior of an X client by providing options on the command line when you call it These options specify the values of certain attributes of clients called resources In addition you can place specifications that establish defaults for resources in resource files The concept of resource files is complex and therefore only the basics necessary for fundamental understanding can be treated here Further documentation A detailed and complete description can be found in e X Window System User s Guide Volume 3 Valerie Quercia Tim O Reilly O Reilly amp Associates January 1993 ISBN 1565920155 Syntax The resource syntax knows loose binding and tight binding name variable value loose binding name variable value tight binding Table 4 26 The loose binding xvideo title my video determines both the title of the control panel and the title of the canvas panel Whereas the tight binding xvideo ctrl title my xvideo control panel xvideo canvyas title my xvideo canvas panel determines the titles of control and canvas panel separately name option The xforms toolkit option name allows to control which resource is evaluated when starting xvideo So if two different resources for foo and for dummy are defined xvideo foo ctrl title foo c
259. ure sensors on the backplane or CPU board Push button On Off Figure 3 10 Front of the OMNIBUS On the front of the OmniBus A18 at the bottom to the right there is the On Off push button 4 Next to it there is an LED 3 showing the operating status of the OmniBus A18 Q In an OmniBus A18 with redundant power supply the LED 3 also lights up green if one of the two power modules is removed but the remaining power module is working well It is not an indicator that redundancy is available Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLL _ 3 10 3 Getting started The back 5 6 7 13 14 20 21 24 26b 27b 25 28 26a 27a 5 CPU board 6 link interface card 7 13 Barco expansion cards e g graphic cards 14 20 Barco expansion cards e g OMNISCALER 21 24 Barco expansion cards e g input cards 25 air supply 26a 26b power switch a standard power module b optional redundant power module 27a 27b mains connection a standard power module b optional redundant power module 28 connection for equipotential bonding conductor Figure 3 11 back of OMNIBUS A18 On the upper part of the back of the OmniBus A18 there are different cards On the left there is the CPU board 5 and the link interface board 6 followed by graphic cards OMNISCALERS and input cards 7 24 depending on the configuration of TRANSFORM A On the right of the lower part is the standard mains
260. uring a monolithic TransForm A In this section configuration of a monolithic TransForm A is demonstrated but this part is identical for both kind of configuration See section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system for the The second question allows you to choose between a complete and a custom configuration see section 6 1 4 Custom configuration Mouse device You can connect different types of mice Please enter the type of mouse you want to use and specify its proper ties If you use the standard USB mouse you must select ov PS 2 or USB Microsoft IntelliMouse and compatible Wheel Mice or 12 No Mouse with Osiris where TRANSFoRM A is operated without local mouse Configuring the Monolithical X Server Please enter the required settings for Mouse Cursor size Configuring the Mouse Device 1 Microsoft Mouse and compatible 2 buttons Mice 2 Mouse Systems 3 buttons Mice 3 MM Series 4 Logitech Mouse old type Logitech protocol 5 Logitech MouseMan Microsoft compatible 6 MM HitTablet 7 PS 2 or USB Microsoft Mouse and compatible Mice 8 PS 2 or USB Microsoft IntelliMouse and compatible Wheel Mice 9 PS 2 or USB Microsoft IntelliMouse Explorer 10 Bus Mouse 11 Unknown 12 No Mouse Enter a protocol number 8 8 Do you have an USB mouse yes no yes yes Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 3 54 X11 big mouse cursor In particular for big display
261. ust be written in a line The following lines contain each a rendering machine engine x the module arrangement mxn the position within the display wall x y and optional the color depth opp xx and visual class cc x The visual class may have the values 3 pseudo color 4 true color or 5 direct color Please see section 4 2 2 Color capabilities for the possible color settings All screens where not explicitly color depth and visual class is assigned use the settings of the X server configuration geometry ContiguousScreens Rendering 2 Rendering 0 Rendering 1 engine O 2x1 00 bpp 16 cc 4 engine l 1x1 2 0 bpp 16 cc 5 O 1 engine 2 3x1 Figure 6 11 Three independent screens in contiguous mode The examples each are shows in an OmniBus configuration Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ______LLL 6 10 6 Advanced configuration The separate screens mode allows displaying multiple screens on multiple display walls and single projection modules Nevertheless it is required that the pixel resolution of each projection module that is used to display the different screens is identical To use separate screens the keyword SeparateScreens must be written in a line of the geometry section As with contiguous screens each following
262. utlet contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the purpose of the ground ing type plug e This equipment must be grounded earthen via the supplied 3 conductor AC power cable If the supplied power cable is not the correct on consult your dealer Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLLLL 1 4 1 Introduction Mains lead AC power cord with CEE 7 plug The wires of the mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code yellow green Earth Ground blue Neutral brown Line Live Figure 1 1 CEE 7 plug Power cord with NEMA 5 15 plug e The cord set must be UL approved and CSA certified e The minimum specification for the flexible cord is No 18 AWG Type SVT or SJT 3 conductor e The cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least 10 A e The attachment plug must be an Earth grounding type with a NEMA 5 15P 10 A 125 V configuration The wires of the power cord are colored in accordance with the following code green or yellow green Earth Ground blue or white Neutral brown or black Line Live Figure 1 2 NEMA 5 15 plug Power cord with GB 2099 plug The wires of the power cord are colored in accordance with the following code yellow green Earth Ground blue Neutral brown Line Live Figure 1 3 GB 2099 plug Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revi
263. view on the back of a device To keep it clearly arranged only the available PCI slots are plotted The display wall is shown from the front Small monolithic system in Processor configuration Below a sketch of a four channel system with digital output and 4 freely movable and scalable video windows in a Processor configuration in a monolithic system video1 video4 14 0 14 3 video2 1 4 1 video3 4 2 1234 PROCESSOR Goo I Figure 3 47 small system in Processor configuration In our example all cards can be inserted into one Processor A TRANSFoRM A in Processor configuration is sufficient to control the wall Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 _____LLLL 3 40 Small monolithic system in OmniBus configuration 3 Getting started A system consisting of one Processor and one OmniBus A12 is the smallest possible system of an OmniBus con figuration Already this setup allows a system of 44 channels if purely graphics data is displayed On the other hand up to 40 videos can be displayed on a wall consisting of two channels Lots of intermediate configurations are also possible In this example there is a configuration shown where the number of output channels and video sources is more balanced in an eight channel system with 24 freely movable video windows 14 0 video1 video5 15 0
264. ving the pattern again Others Display text which contains many HHHHHHH Table 4 16 Adjusting the preset e Setup a suitable test pattern on the connected computer e Start the video client xvideo e Select the input channel in the Control tab Channel 1 or Channel 2 ed H ez fall Tiz i i ae bat BELA ee lal es at dek ial eH H Ey x SE ed ii ji pE jiz jiz ie a ptt ie Fi Hl tial a a ate HESI fi i fiai lai wl al E PEEL a a het thet mt aj He cl i a i fin EEE Hh He oh ii Fl i Eil i Wiest i a pi bet i i A it i i lis Bai Figure 4 12 Configuring RGB input If you want to display a source only once so that there is no benefit in saving the input settings the fastest way is to have the options Detect Signal and Detect Pos enabled Please note that Detect Pos performs a visible adaptation cycle each time the signal changes If you want to avoid this please use the procedure below Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt lt lt 4 35 4 Operating If you want to adapt the settings with the possibility to save them in a preset do the following e Switch to the Input Settings tab and press Auto This will automatically detect the source and set the right preset e lf necessary switch to the Input Settings tab and tune PLL Devider approx 1 3 x horizontal size until the test pattern is displayed correctly e Align the display within the win
265. xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxk kxxk When configuration is completed you can enter service mmt serv to start the X server eos opt MMT2686 config service mmtserv eosxs Utility Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 If you operate TransForm A in eXtended safety boot mode please take care to update the backup partition after successful configuration see section 4 8 5 Backup and restore procedures 3 66 4 Operating 4 Operating This chapter shows the capabilities that TRANSForm A offers displaying graphics and video The multi screen capa bility of TRANSForm A the extensions of the X server and the X window system s strategies for color management are explained You are introduced into operating the video client for displaying video and RGB signals and the remote control client for controlling a Barco display wall Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 lt 4 4 Operating 4 1 Multi screen capability An essential feature of TRANSForm A is the multi screen capability which differs in some points from the multi head mode of a conventional X server The X server of TRANSForRM A allows a root window that extends over all connected projection modules In this case X clients use the whole display area without even knowing this transparent multi screen For an exact description of the differences between m
266. yout Configures in a distributed system to each video adapter its own video channel For usage of logical video channels please refer to section 3 4 3 Configuring a distributed system and 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A noise reduction lt level gt Sets the noise reduction level for all video clients of QUAD ANALOG VIDEO CARD FRG 3292 Integer values in the range from 0 to 16 can be specified Optimal noise reduction has to consider the content of the displayed Source O off no noise reduction 1 most modest level of noise reduction 12 default value 16 maximum value If the option is not set the default value of 12 is applied Table 6 2 The desired options must be entered manually each in a single line in the file etc MMTconfig MMTServerConfig Subsequently the X Server must be restarted to make the above changes effective X Server parameters that shall not be changed at a new run of the script EOSconfig can be entered between the two lines BeginSection Private EndSection The file MMTServerConfig already contains lines inserted automatically by the configuration script Do not change these entries manually Barco TransForm A X Terminal DOC 3265 2 user s manual Revision 11 August 2008 ___ _ 6 9 6 Advanced configuration 6 1 6 Advanced configuration of TransForm A The geometry of the rendering machines the assignment of video and graphic channels the REMoTE CONTRO

TransForm A X Terminal user`s manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents